Yamaha CLP-950M El manual del propietario

Categoría
Pianos digitales
Tipo
El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

IMPORTANT
Check your power supply
Make sure that your local AC
mains voltage matches the volt-
age specified on the name plate
on the bottom panel. In some ar-
eas a voltage selector may be
provided on the bottom panel of
the main keyboard unit near the
power cord. Make sure that the
voltage selector is set for the volt-
age in your area. The voltage se-
lector is set at 240V when the unit
is initially shipped. To change the
setting use a “minus” screwdriver
to rotate the selector dial so that
the correct voltage appears next
to the pointer on the panel.
WICHTIG
Überprüfung der Stromversorgung
Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem An-
schließen an das Stromnetz, daß die
örtliche Netzspannung den
Betriebsspannungswerten auf dem
Typenschild an der Unterseite des In-
struments entspricht. In bestimmten
Verkaufsgebieten ist das Instrument
mit einem Spannungswähler an der
Unterseite neben der Netzkabel-
durchführung ausgestattet. Falls vor-
handen, muß der Spannungswähler
auf die örtliche Netzspannung einge-
stellt werden. Der Spannungswähler
wurde werkseitig auf 240 V voreinge-
stellt. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den
Spannungsregler mit einem Schlitz-
schraubendreher, bis der Zeiger auf
den korrekten Spannungswert weist.
IMPORTANT
Contrôler la source d’alimentation
Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur
le panneau inférieur correspond à
la tension du secteur. Dans certai-
nes régions, l’instrument peut être
équipé d’un sélecteur de tension si-
tué sur le panneau inférieur du cla-
vier à proximité du cordon d’alimen-
tation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est
bien réglé en fonction de la tension
secteur de votre région. Le sélec-
teur de tension est réglé sur 240 V
au départ d’usine. Pour modifier ce
réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame
plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin
de mettre l’indication correspondant
à la tension de votre région vis à vis
du repère triangulaire situé sur le
panneau.
IMPORTANTE
Verifique la alimentación de
corriente
Asegúrese de que tensión de ali-
mentación de CA de su área corres-
ponde con la tensión especificada en
la placa de características del panel
inferior. En algunas zonas puede
haberse incorporado un selector de
tensión en el panel inferior de la
unidad del teclado principal, cerca del
cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de
que el selector de tensión esté
ajustado a la tensión de su área. El
selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V
cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para
cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destorni-
llador de cabeza “recta” para girar el
selector de modo que aparezca la
tensión correcta al lado del indicador
del panel.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
92-469 1
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap-
proximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-
essary, contact a qualified service representative to per-
form the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and con-
sult your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph-
ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi-
cated on this page and those indicated in the safety in-
struction section.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings
The exclamation point within the equi-
lateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important oper-
ating and maintenance (servicing) in-
structions in the literature accompany-
ing the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert the user to the pres-
ence of uninsulated “dangerous volt-
age” within the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient magnitude to con-
stitute a risk of electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic prod-
ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety
testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when
it is properly installed and used in its normal and custom-
ary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated.
DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product per-
formance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
CLP-950/950M/950C
Model _____________________________________
Serial No. __________________________________
Purchase Date ______________________________
CLP-930
3
CLP-950/930
Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
finger or hand in the key cover gap.
Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of
the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the
power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch
from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly
result in the instrument overheating.
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly pro-
cess. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might re-
sult in damage to the instrument or even injury.
Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom-
fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
USING THE BENCH (if included)
Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-
ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten
them periodically using the included tool.
SAVING USER DATA
Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3,
in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or
user operating error.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modi-
fications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,
short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts.
If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and
have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the
outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy
objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,
or roll anything over it.
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con-
nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over-
heating in the outlet.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening
level.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter-
nal components.
Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions,
radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect
proper operation of the other products.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acciden-
tally fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not
use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wip-
ing cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instru-
ment, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do
not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
(1)B-6
4
CLP-950/930
Introduction
Thank you for choosing a Yamaha Clavinova. Your Clavinova is a fine musical instrument that employs
advanced Yamaha music technology. With the proper care, your Clavinova will give you many years of
musical pleasure.
The Clavinova CLP-950/930 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural
grand-piano type playability with Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone
generation technology on the CLP-950 and “AWM Stereo Sampling” on the CLP-930 for
rich, musical voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard which provides graded key
weight and response throughout the keyboard range. The grand piano voices feature totally
new samples painstakingly recorded from a full concert grand piano.
The CLP-950 GRAND PIANO 1 voice features multiple velocity-switched samples (Dy-
namic Sampling), a “Soundboard Reverb” effect which accurately simulates the resonance
of a piano soundboard, special “Sustain Samples” which recreate the unique resonance of
an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and
“Key-off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released.
Dual mode allows 2 voices to be played simultaneously.
Split mode (CLP-950) allows different voices to be played by the left and right hands.
Metronome feature with variable tempo facilitates practice.
2-track digital recorder lets you record and play back anything you play on the keyboard.
MIDI compatibility and a range of MIDI functions make the Clavinova useful in a range of
advanced MIDI music systems.
Built-in computer interface for direct connection to personal computers running advanced
music software. The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop-type
personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument.
In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, we urge you to read
this Owners Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.
* The models CLP-950M and CLP-950C will be referred to as the CLP-950 in this Owner’s Manual.
Included Accessories
Owner’s Manual
Bench (included or optional depending on locale)
“50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection
Trademarks
Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that
describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a
personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the
manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as
a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address:
Clavinova Home Page:
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
5
CLP-950/930
Contents
The Control Panel .......................................................... 6
Connections ................................................................... 8
Key Cover & Music Stand ............................................ 10
Selecting & Playing Voices .......................................... 11
Playing the Demonstration Tunes ................................ 12
Voice Demo .............................................................. 12
Preset Song ............................................................. 13
Preset Song A-B Repeat......................................... 14
Preset Song Part Cancel ........................................15
Synchro Start..................................................... 15
Left Pedal Start/Stop ......................................... 15
The Dual Mode ............................................................ 16
Other Dual Mode Functions...............................16
The Split Mode (CLP-950) ............................................... 17
Selecting the Right and Left Voices ...................17
Setting the Split Point ........................................ 17
Other Split Mode Functions ............................... 17
Reverb ........................................................................ 18
Adjusting Reverb Depth ..................................... 18
The Effect .................................................................... 19
Adjusting Effect Depth ....................................... 19
Brilliance (CLP-950) ........................................................ 19
The Pedals................................................................... 20
Damper (Right) Pedal ........................................ 20
Sostenuto (Center) Pedal .................................. 20
Soft (Left) Pedal ................................................. 20
Touch Sensitivity ......................................................... 21
Transposition ............................................................... 21
Tuning ......................................................................... 22
Tuning Up........................................................... 22
Tuning Down ...................................................... 22
To Restore Standard Pitch ................................. 22
The Metronome & Tempo Control ................................ 23
The Metronome........................................................ 23
Metronome Time Signature ............................... 23
Metronome Volume Function ............................. 23
Tempo Control ......................................................... 23
Using the User Song Recorder ..................................... 24
Recording ................................................................ 24
Changing the Initial Settings .............................. 25
Erasing a Single Track ....................................... 25
Playback................................................................... 26
Synchro Start..................................................... 26
Left Pedal Start/Stop ......................................... 26
The Function Mode ...................................................... 27
To Select a Function …...................................... 27
F1: Tuning ................................................................ 28
F2: Scale .................................................................. 28
F2.1: Scale ........................................................... 28
F2.2: Base Note ................................................... 28
F3: Dual Mode Functions ....................................... 29
F3.1: Dual Balance ............................................... 29
F3.2: Dual Detune ................................................ 29
F3.3: 1st Voice Octave Shift ................................. 29
F3.4: 2nd Voice Octave Shift ................................ 29
F3.5: 1st Voice Effect Depth ................................. 30
F3.6: 2nd Voice Effect Depth ................................ 30
F3.7: Reset ...........................................................30
F4: CLP-950 Split Mode Functions ........................ 30
F4.1: Split Point .................................................... 30
F4.2: Split Balance ............................................... 30
F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift .............................. 31
F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift ................................ 31
F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth .............................. 31
F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth ................................ 31
F4.7: Damper Range ............................................ 31
F4.8: Reset ...........................................................31
F4: CLP-930 Left Pedal Mode ................................. 31
F5: CLP-950 Pedal Functions ................................. 32
F5.1: Left Pedal Mode .......................................... 32
F5.2: Sustain Sample Depth ................................ 32
F5: CLP-930 Metronome Volume ............................ 32
F6: CLP-950 Metronome Volume ............................ 32
F6: CLP-930 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ..... 32
F7: CLP-950 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ..... 32
F7: CLP-930 MIDI Functions................................... 33
F8: CLP-950 MIDI Functions................................... 33
A Brief Introduction to MIDI ............................... 33
F7.1/F8.1: MIDI Transmit Channel Selection ........ 33
F7.2/F8.2: MIDI Receive Channel Selection ........ 33
F7.3/F8.3: Local Control ON/OFF ........................ 34
F7.4/F8.4: Program Change ON/OFF .................. 34
F7.5/F8.5: Control Change ON/OFF .................... 35
F7.6/F8.6: MIDI Transmit Transpose ..................... 35
F7.7/F8.7: Panel/Status Transmit ......................... 35
F7.8/F8.8: Bulk Data Dump .................................. 35
F8: CLP-930 Backup Functions ............................. 36
F9: CLP-950 Backup Functions ............................. 36
F8.1/F9.1: Voice ................................................... 36
F8.2/F9.2: MIDI .................................................... 36
F8.3/F9.3: Tuning .................................................. 36
F8.4/F9.4: Pedal ................................................... 36
Connecting to a Personal Computer ............................. 37
Connecting to an Apple Macintosh Series Computer
.... 37
Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer
........ 38
Using a USB Interface (such as the Yamaha UX256)
.... 39
Factory Preset Recall .................................................. 40
Troubleshooting........................................................... 40
Options & Expander Modules ...................................... 40
Voice Descriptions .............................................................41
Demo Song List .................................................................. 42
Factory Setting List............................................................ 42
MIDI Data Format................................................................ 43
MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................... 47
CLP-950: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................... 48
CLP-930: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................... 54
Specifications ..................................................................... 60
6
CLP-950/930
CLP-
950
MIN MELLOW BRIGHT
ON ON /NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YESSTART/
STOP
START/
STOP
RECTEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
MAX
MASTER VOLUME BRILLIANCE DEMO
FUNCTION
METRONOME SONG VOICE REVERB TOUCHEFFECT
TRANSPOSE
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
JAZZ
ORGAN
STRINGS CHOIR WOOD
BASS
E. BASS SPLIT
ROOM
HALL 1
HALL 2
STAGE
CHORUS
PHASER
TREMOLO
DELAY
HARD
MEDIUM
SOFT
POWER
B0A0G0F0E0D0C0B-1A-1
C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6
D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7
CLP-950
1
The Control Panel
1 [POWER] Switch
Press the [POWER] switch once to turn the
power ON, a second time to turn the power OFF.
When the power is initially turned ON, a voice
selector LED will light, and the power indicator
located below the left end of the keyboard will light.
2 [MASTER VOLUME] Control
The [MASTER VOLUME] control adjusts the
volume (level) of sound produced by the Clavinova’s
internal stereo sound system. The [MASTER
VOLUME] control also adjusts headphone volume
when a pair of headphones is plugged into the
PHONES jack (page 10).
3 [BRILLIANCE] Control (CLP-950)
The [BRILLIANCE] Control adjusts the tonality
or “timbre” of the output sound from a mellow tone
to a bright tone.
4 [DEMO] Button
Activates the demo playback mode in which you
can select playback of different demonstration
sequences for each of the Clavinova’s voices. See
page 12 for details.
5 [TRANSPOSE] Button
The [TRANSPOSE] button allows access to the
Clavinova’s TRANSPOSE function (to shift the
pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone
intervals).
6 [FUNCTION] Button
This button accesses a range of utility functions
— including the MIDI functions — that significantly
enhance versatility and playability. See page 27 for
details.
7 METRONOME [START/STOP] Button
Turns the metronome sound on and off. The
[TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons are used to
set the tempo of the metronome sound. The [–/NO]
and [+/YES] buttons are used to change the time
signature (beat) of the metronome if used while the
METRONOME [START/STOP] button is held —
page 23.
PHONES jacks on bottom panel (see page 10)
Tuning keys (See page 22)
CLP-950
23
4
5
67 8 9 0
@
!
CLP-930
2
4
5
67 8 9 0
@
!
CLP-
950
MIN MELLOW BRIGHT
ON ON /NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YESSTART/
STOP
START/
STOP
RECTEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
MAX
MASTER VOLUME BRILLIANCE DEMO
FUNCTION
METRONOME SONG
TRANSPOSE
CLP-
930
MIN
ON ON /NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YESSTART/
STOP
START/
STOP
RECTEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
MAX
MASTER VOLUME DEMO
FUNCTION
METRONOME SONG
TRANSPOSE
7
CLP-950/930
The Control Panel
8 [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] Buttons
These buttons adjust the tempo of the metronome
function as well as the playback tempo of the re-
corder function. The tempo range is from 32 to 280
beats per minute — page 23. These same buttons are
also used to select functions — page 27.
9 [/NO], [+/YES] Buttons
These buttons select a preset song number for
playback, and are also used to adjust a range of other
parameters.
0 [PRESET SONG] Button
This button enters the preset song mode. While in
this mode you can use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to select from 50 songs.
! TRACK [1] and [2] Buttons
The Clavinova has a 2-track recorder, and these
buttons are used to select the track(s) to be recorded
or played back. See page 24 for details.
@ SONG [START/STOP] and [REC] Buttons
These buttons control the Clavinova’s user song
recorder, letting you record and play back just about
anything you play on the keyboard.
# Voice Selectors
Simply press any of the voice selectors to select
the corresponding voice. The voice selector LED
will light to indicate which voice is currently se-
lected.
There is also a dual mode in which two voices
can be played simultaneously across the full range of
the keyboard (see page 16 for details), and a split
mode on the CLP-950 which allows different voices
to be played by the left and right hands (see page 17
for details).
$ [SPLIT] Button (CLP-950)
Engages the split mode, in which different voices
can be played on the left- and right-hand sections of
the keyboard. See page 17 for details.
% [REVERB] Button
The [REVERB] button selects a number of
digital reverb effects that you can use for extra depth
and expressive power. See page 18 for details.
^ [EFFECT] Button
This button selects a number of effects which can
give your sound greater depth and animation.
& [TOUCH] Button
The [TOUCH] button makes it easy to adjust the
touch response of the Clavinova to match your
playing style. See page 21 for details.
* Pedals
The soft (left), sostenuto (center) and damper
(right) pedals provide a range of expressive control
capabilities similar to the pedal functions on an
acoustic piano. See page 20 for details.
*
Soft pedal
Damper pedal
Sostenuto pedal
#$
&
%^
#
&
%^
VOICE REVERB TOUCHEFFECT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
JAZZ
ORGAN
STRINGS CHOIR WOOD
BASS
E. BASS SPLIT
ROOM
HALL 1
HALL 2
STAGE
CHORUS
PHASER
TREMOLO
DELAY
HARD
MEDIUM
SOFT
VOICE REVERB TOUCHEFFECT
GRAND
PIANO
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
STRINGS CHOIR
ROOM
HALL 1
HALL 2
STAGE
CHORUS
PHASER
TREMOLO
DELAY
HARD
MEDIUM
SOFT
8
CLP-950/930
Connections
1 AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks
The AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output of the Clavinova
for connection to an instrument amplifier, mixing console, PA system, or
recording equipment. If you will be connecting the Clavinova to a monaural
sound system, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/
L+R jack only, the left- and right-channel signals are combined and deliv-
ered via the L/L+R jack so you don’t lose any of the Clavinova’s sound.
CAUTION
When the Clavinovas AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external sound system,
first turn the Clavinova power on, and then the power to the external amplifier/
speaker system. Reverse this order when turning the power off.
The AUX OUT jack signal must never be returned to the AUX IN jacks, either directly
or through external equipment.
The AUX OUT jack signal is not controlled by the Clavinovas volume or
brilliance (CLP-950) control. Use the volume control on the external audio
equipment to adjust the level.
2 AUX IN L/L+R and R Jacks
These jacks are intended for use with an external tone generator module
such as the Yamaha DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit. The stereo outputs from
the external tone generator module are connected to the AUX IN L/L+R
and R jacks, allowing the sound of the tone generator to be reproduced via
the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. A line-level mono
source can be connected to the L/L+R jack.
CAUTION
When the Clavinovas AUX IN jacks are connected to an external source, first turn the
power to the external device on, and then the power to the Clavinova. Reverse this
order when turning the power off.
The input signal from the AUX IN jacks is controlled by the Clavinovas volume
and brilliance (CLP-950) controls. Reverb and effect functions will have no
affect.
The input signal from the AUX IN jacks is delivered to the AUX OUT jacks.
12 3 4 5
TO HOST HOST SELECT
PC-1 PC-2
Mac
MIDI
PEDAL
AUX IN
RL
/
L+R
AUX OUT
RL
/
L+R
MIDI
INOUTTHRU
HOST SELECT TO HOST
PC-1PC-2
MacMIDI
MIDI
IN OUT THRU
AUX IN
RL
/
L+R
AUX OUT
RL
/
L+R
CLP-930 Bottom Panel
CLP-950 Bottom Panel
1234
AUX OUT
RL
/
L+R
Stereo System
AUX IN
RL
/
L+R
DOU-10
CLP-930
CLP-930
Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power for all compo-
nents. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all-volume levels to minimum.
CAUTION
9
CLP-950/930
3 TO HOST Connector & HOST SELECT Switch
This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a per-
sonal computer for sequencing and other music applications —
without the need for a separate MIDI interface. See page 37 for
details.
4 MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors
The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external
MIDI device (such as the DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit) which can
be used to control the Clavinova. The MIDI THRU connector re-
transmits any data received at the MIDI IN connector, allowing
“chaining” of several MIDI instruments or other devices. The MIDI
OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the Clavinova
(e.g. note and velocity data produced by playing the Clavinova
keyboard).
More details on MIDI are given in “MIDI Functions” on page 33.
5 PEDAL Jack (CLP-930)
This terminal is for connecting the pedal cord from the pedal box
(refer to the “Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages 55-59).
PHONES Jacks
(Bottom Panel)
Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here
for private practice or late-night playing. The internal speaker
system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is
plugged into either of the PHONES jacks.
HOST SELECTTO HOST
MIDIMac
PC-2PC-1
Tone Generator
MIDI
INOUTTHRU
DOU-10
Personal Computer
Connections
CLP-930
CLP-930
10
CLP-950/930
To open the key cover:
ZLift the cover slightly.
XSlide the cover open.
CAUTION
Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully opened or closed.
Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the cover and main unit.
Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside
the main unit when the cover is opened and may not be able to be removed. This could cause electric
shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument.
To close the key cover:
ZSlide the cover toward you.
XGently lower the cover over the keys.
Be careful to avoid catching your
fingers when opening or closing
the cover.
Key Cover & Music Stand
Key Cover
Music Stand
The Clavinova is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to
the instrument by inserting it into the holes at the top of panel.
NOTE
The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop-type
personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument.
CLP-930
CLP-930
11
CLP-950/930
After making sure that the Clavinova’s AC cord is properly plugged
into the Clavinova itself and plugged into a convenient AC wall outlet,
press the [POWER] switch located to the right of the keyboard to turn
the power ON. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match
the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.
When the power is turned ON, one of the voice selector LEDs will
light, and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard
will light.
Set the Volume ..................................................................................................
Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] control about half way
between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing,
re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control for the most comfortable
listening level.
Select a Voice .....................................................................................................
Select the desired voice by pressing one of the voice selectors.
NOTE
See Voice Descriptions on page 41.
CLP-950
Play................................................................................................................................
The Clavinova also offers keyboard touch response, so the volume
and timbre of notes played can be controlled according to how “hard”
you play the keys. The amount of variation available depends on the
selected voice.
NOTE
Some voices do not have keyboard touch response. See Voice Descrip-
tions on page 41 for details.
Add Effects As Required .......................................................................
You can add or change reverb, effects and brilliance (CLP-950) as
desired by using the [REVERB] button (page 18), [EFFECT] button
(page 19) and the [BRILLIANCE] control (page 19).
Turn Power On...................................................................................................
Selecting & Playing Voices
POWER
MIN MAX
MASTER VOLUME
VOICE
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
JAZZ
ORGAN
STRINGS CHOIR WOOD
BASS
E. BASS
REVERB
ROOM
HALL 1
HALL 2
STAGE
EFFECT
CHORUS
PHASER
TREMOLO
DELAY
MELLOW BRIGHT
BRILLIANCE
12
CLP-950/930
Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the
Clavinovas voices. There are also 50 preset songs that you can play individually,
all in sequence, or in random order. The 50 greats for the Clavinova score
collection provided with the Clavinova includes the written scores for all 50
preset songs. Heres how you can select and play the demo tunes.
NOTE
The demo or preset song mode cannot be engaged while a user song recorder (page 24) is in
use.
No MIDI reception occurs in the demo/preset song mode.
The demo/preset song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors.
* See page 42 for a complete listing of the demo tunes.
Playing the Demonstration Tunes
Engage the Demo Mode .........................................................................
Play a Voice Demo.........................................................................................
Press one of the voice selectors to start playback of all songs starting
from the corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice nor-
mally selected by that voice selector button. (If you press the SONG
[START/STOP] button instead of a voice selector button, the GRAND
PIANO 1 (GRAND PIANO: CLP-930) demo tune will begin play-
back.) The indicator of the selected voice selector button will flash
during playback, and “- - -” will appear on the LED display. You can
start playback of any other voice demo tune during playback by simply
pressing the corresponding voice selector. You can stop playback at any
time by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button or the voice
selector of the currently playing demo.
NOTE
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume and the
[BRILLIANCE] control (CLP-950) to adjust the brilliance (page 19).
Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode — the voice
selector indicators will flash in sequence.
CLP-930
Voice Demo
Exit From the Demo Mode....................................................................
Press the [DEMO] button to exit from the demo mode and return to
the normal play mode.
DEMO
VOICE
GRAND
PIANO
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
STRINGS CHOIR
DEMO
13
CLP-950/930
Engage the Preset Song Mode .......................................................
Play a Preset Song .......................................................................................
To play any of the 50 preset songs provided, use the [–/NO], [+/YES]
buttons to select the number of the tune you want to play (the number will
appear on the LED display), then press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Playback will stop automatically when playback of the selected preset song
has finished.
Select “ALL” instead of a number to play all preset songs in sequence, or
select “rnd” to continuously play all preset songs in random order. Press
the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume.
You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION
,
] buttons to adjust the
playback tempo as required. This produces a relative tempo variation,
with a range from -50 through - - - to 50 at maximum; the range will
differ depending on the selected song.
The default tempo - - - is automatically selected whenever a new preset
song is selected, or playback of a new preset song begins during
ALL
or
rnd
playback.
You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. The voice
playing on the keyboard can be changed.
You can change the Brilliance control (CLP-950) and Reverb type that is
applied to the voice you play on the keyboard and for the preset song
playback. You can change the Effect type and Touch sensitivity that is
applied to the voice you play on the keyboard. When a new preset song is
selected or a new preset song is automatically started in continuous play,
the HALL 1 reverb type will automatically be selected.
Press the [PRESET SONG] button to engage the preset song mode
— the [PRESET SONG], TRACK [1] and [2] indicators will light.
Preset Song
Exit From the Preset Song Mode..................................................
Press the [PRESET SONG] button to exit from the preset song mode,
the indicator will go off, and return to the normal play mode.
Playing the Demonstration Tunes
/NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YES START/
STOP
REC
SONG
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
/NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YES START/
STOP
REC
SONG
/NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YES START/
STOP
REC
SONG
14
CLP-950/930
Preset Song A-B Repeat
The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a
specified phrase within a preset song. Combined with the Part Cancel
function described below, this provides an excellent way to practice
difficult phrases.
Specify the Beginning (A) of the Phrase..............................
Select and play a preset song, then press the [FUNCTION] button
at the beginning of the phrase you want to repeat. This sets the “A”
point (“A-” will appear on the display).
To set the “A” point at the very beginning of the song, press the
[FUNCTION] button before starting playback.
Specify the End (B) of the Phrase ...............................................
Press the [FUNCTION] button a second time at the end of the
phrase. This sets the “B” point (“A-b” will appear on the display). At
this point repeat playback will begin between the specified A and B
points. The metronome will sound when playback begins to give you a
tempo reference. However, if playback repeats from the beginning of
the song, there will be no tempo reference from metronome.
To set the B point at the song’s end, press the [FUNCTION] button
after song playback is complete and before “A- ” disappears from the
display.
Stop Playback....................................................................................................
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback while
retaining the specified A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume
if the SONG [START/STOP] button is then pressed again.
To cancel the A and B points press the [FUNCTION] button once.
NOTE
The A and B points are automatically canceled when a new song is
selected.
The A-B Repeat function cannot be used during
ALL
or
rnd
playback.
ON
FUNCTION
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
ON
FUNCTION
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
/NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YES START/
STOP
REC
SONG
Playing the Demonstration Tunes
15
CLP-950/930
Preset Song Part Cancel
The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts that can
be turned on and off as required so you can practice the corresponding
part on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by TRACK [1]
track, and the left-hand part is played by TRACK [2] track.
Turn the Desired Part Off.......................................................................
Press the TRACK [1] or [2] button to turn the corresponding part off
— the corresponding indicator will go out (these buttons alternately
toggle the corresponding part on and off).
NOTE
The parts can be turned on or off even during playback.
The Preset Song Part Cancel function cannot be used during
ALL
or
rnd
playback.
The Preset Song Part Cancel Volume function described on page 32
can be used to set the canceled part so that it plays at a volume from 0
(no sound) to 20. The default setting is 5.
Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever a new song is selected.
Start/Stop Playback.....................................................................................
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start and stop playback
as required.
Synchro Start .....................................................................................................
When the Synchro Start function is engaged, playback of the se-
lected preset song will begin automatically as soon as you start playing
on the keyboard.
To engage the Synchro Start function press the SONG [START/
STOP] button while holding the part button corresponding to the part
which is ON. A dot will appear in the lower right corner of the display.
(Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Syncro Start function.)
Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the key-
board.
NOTE
If you hold a track button which is OFF while pressing the SONG [START/
STOP] button, that track will be turned ON and the Synchro Start mode
will be engaged.
Left Pedal Start/Stop ..................................................................................
The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop preset song playback
via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on pages 31 (CLP-930)
and 32 (CLP-950).
/NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YES START/
STOP
REC
SONG
/NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YES START/
STOP
REC
SONG
/NO PRESET
SONG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
+
/YES START/
STOP
REC
SONG
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
Playing the Demonstration Tunes
16
CLP-950/930
The Dual Mode
The dual mode makes it possible to play two voices simultaneously across
the entire range of the keyboard.
To activate the dual mode simply press two voice selectors at the
same time (or press one voice selector while holding another). The
voice indicators of both selected voices will light when the dual mode is
active. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single
voice selector.
According to the voice numbering priority as shown in the diagram
on the left, lower valued voice numbers will be designated as the 1st
Voice (the other voice will be designated as the 2nd Voice).
NOTE
The dual and split modes (CLP-950) cannot be engaged at the same
time.
[EFFECT] in the Dual Mode
Depending upon the conditions one effect type will take priority over the
other. Depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the
voice combination. However, using function F3 (see page 29) you can
change the depth value for each voice as you like.
Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/
YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button see page 19) will be
applied to the 1st Voice only.
[REVERB] in the Dual Mode
The reverb type assigned to the 1st Voice will take priority over the other.
(If the reverb is set to OFF, the 2nd Voices reverb type will be in affect.)
Reverb depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/
YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button see page 18) will be
applied to the 1st Voice only.
Other Dual Mode Functions ...............................................................
The Clavinova Function mode provides access to a number of other
dual-mode functions, listed below. See the corresponding pages for
details.
Dual Balance ................................................. 29
Dual Detune .................................................. 29
1st Voice Octave Shift ................................... 29
2nd Voice Octave Shift .................................. 29
1st Voice Effect Depth ................................... 30
2nd Voice Effect Depth .................................. 30
Reset ............................................................. 30
Voice numbering priority
AND
NO 2
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHU
OR
G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VOICE
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
JAZZ
ORGAN
STRINGS CHOIR WOOD
BASS
E. BASS
CLP-950
17
CLP-950/930
The Split Mode (CLP-950)
The split mode makes it possible to play two different voices on the keyboard
one with the left hand and another with the right hand. The Left Voice is
played on all keys to the left of (and including) a specified split point key, while
the Right Voice is played on all keys to the right of the split point key.
To activate the split mode simply press the [SPLIT] button so that its
indicator lights. The split mode can be turned off at any time by pressing the
[SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out.
NOTE
The dual and split modes cannot be engaged at the same time.
Selecting the Right and Left Voices.....................................................
The voice that was selected before the split mode was engaged becomes
the Right Voice in the split mode. (The Right Voice can also be changed while
in the split mode, by simply pressing the corresponding voice selector.)
To select a Left Voice press the corresponding voice selector while
holding the [SPLIT] button (default: [WOOD BASS]). The indicator of the
Left Voice selector will light while the [SPLIT] button is pressed, then only
the Right Voice selector and [SPLIT] button indicators will remain lit.
NOTE
[EFFECT] in the Split Mode
Depending upon the conditions, one effect type will take priority over the other.
Depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice
combination. However, using function F4 (see page 30) you can change the
depth value for each voice as you like.
Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/YES]
buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button see page 19) will be applied to
the Right Voice only.
[REVERB] in the Split Mode
The reverb type assigned to the Right Voice will take priority over the other. (If
the reverb is set to OFF, the Left Voices reverb type will be in affect.)
Reverb depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/YES]
buttons while holding the [REVERB] button see page 18) will be applied to
the Right Voice only.
Setting the Split Point .........................................................................................
The split point is initially set at the F#2 key by default. You can change
the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the
[SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the LED
display while the [SPLIT] button is held). The split point can also be set via
the Function mode (see below).
Other Split Mode Functions .........................................................................
The Clavinova Function mode provides access to a number of other
split-mode functions, listed below. See the corresponding pages for details.
Split Point ...................................................... 30
Split Balance ................................................. 30
Right Voice Octave Shift ................................ 31
Left Voice Octave Shift .................................. 31
Right Voice Effect Depth................................ 31
Left Voice Effect Depth .................................. 31
Damper Range .............................................. 31
Reset ............................................................. 31
A-1 b=1 C 2 F~2
A-1 Bb-1 C2 F#2
Example:
•“b is indicated with a lower _.
•“# is indicated with an upper ~.
SPLIT
SPLIT
VOICE
R
PSI-
O
RD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
JAZZ
ORGAN
STRI
N
SPLIT
18
CLP-950/930
Reverb
The [REVERB] button selects a number of digital reverb effects that you can
use for extra depth and expressive power.
To select a reverb type press the [REVERB] button a few times until
the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators
light in sequence each time the [REVERB] button is pressed). No
reverb is produced when all indicators are off.
OFF
No reverb effect is selected when no REVERB indicator is lit.
ROOM
This setting add a continuous reverb effect to the sound that is similar
to the type of acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room.
HALL 1
For a bigger reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect
simulates the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall.
HALL 2
For a really spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect
simulates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall.
STAGE
A simulation of the type of reverb produced in a stage environment.
NOTE
The default reverb type (including OFF) and depth settings are different
for each voice.
Even if the REVERB effect is OFF, a soundboard reverb effect will be
applied when the CLP-950 GRAND PIANO 1 voice is selected.
Adjusting Reverb Depth .........................................................................
Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO]
and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button. The depth
range is from 0 through 20 (the current depth setting appears on the
LED display while the [REVERB] button is held). A setting of “0”
produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum reverb
depth. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously while
holding the [REVERB] button to recall the default setting for the
current voice (default depth settings are different for each voice).
REVERB
ROOM
HALL 1
HALL 2
STAGE
REVERB
ROOM
HALL 1
HALL 2
STAGE
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
/NO
+
/YES
19
CLP-950/930
Brilliance (CLP-950)
For a brighter or “sharper” tone, slide the control towards the
BRIGHT position. For a “rounder” more mellow tone, slide the control
towards the MELLOW position.
NOTE
When the BRILLIANCE is set to BRIGHT, the overall sound will be slightly
louder. If the MASTER VOLUME is set at a high level the sound may
become distorted. If so, lower the MASTER VOLUME level.
This control can be used to change the tonality or timbre of the sound
output. The control range is from MELLOW to BRIGHT.
The Effect
The [EFFECT] button allows you to select one of the effects that can give
your sound greater depth and animation.
To select an effect type press the [EFFECT] button a few times until
the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators
light in sequence each time the [EFFECT] button is pressed). No effect
is produced when all indicators are off.
OFF
No effect is selected when no EFFECT indicator is lit.
CHORUS
Shimmering, broadening effect
PHASER
Adds depth to the sound.
TREMOLO
Tremolo effect
DELAY
Echo effect
NOTE
The default effect type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for
each voice.
Adjusting Effect Depth.............................................................................
Effect depth can be individually adjusted for the selected voice by
using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT]
button. The depth range is from 0 through 20 (the current depth setting
appears on the LED display while the [EFFECT] button is held). A
setting of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces
maximum effect depth. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simulta-
neously while holding the [EFFECT] button to recall the default
setting for the current voice (the default depth settings are different for
each voice).
EFFECT
CHORUS
PHASER
TREMOLO
DELAY
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
/NO
+
/YES
EFFECT
CHORUS
PHASER
TREMOLO
DELAY
MELLOW BRIGHT
BRILLIANCE
20
CLP-950/930
The Pedals
Soft (Left) Pedal ...............................................................................................
The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of
notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect
notes which are already playing when it is pressed.
The left pedal can also be assigned to song start/stop operation via
the “Left Pedal Mode” described on pages 31 (CLP-930) and 32 (CLP-
950).
The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive
effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.
Soft pedal
Damper pedal
Sostenuto pedal
Sostenuto (Center) Pedal ......................................................................
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto
pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as
the pedal is held (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all
subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible
to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.”
NOTE
Organ, string and choir voices will continue to sound for as long as the
sostenuto pedal is depressed.
Damper (Right) Pedal ................................................................................
The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on
an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed notes played have
a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any
sustained notes.
When the GRAND PIANO 1 voice is selected on the CLP-950,
pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain
Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic
grand piano’s soundboard and strings.
NOTE
On the CLP-950 the depth of the effect produced by the Sustain
Samples can be adjusted via the Pedal Functions (page 32) in the
function mode.
If the damper pedal doesnt work, or notes are sustained even when the
pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged
into the main unit (page 58: CLP-930, page 50: CLP-950).
21
CLP-950/930
Touch Sensitivity
Four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT
or FIXED can be selected to match different playing styles and preferences.
To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few
times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the
indicators light in sequence each time the [TOUCH] button is pressed).
HARD
The HARD setting requires the keys to be played quite hard to
produce maximum loudness.
MEDIUM
The MEDIUM setting produces a fairly standard keyboard response.
This is the initial factory default setting.
SOFT
The SOFT setting allows maximum loudness to be produced with
relatively light key pressure.
FIXED (no indicator lit)
All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the
keyboard is played.
When the FIXED type is selected, the volume of notes played in the
FIXED mode can be set by using the [/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while
the [TOUCH] button is held (the current volume level appears on the
display). The volume range is from 1 through 127. The default setting
is 64.
NOTE
This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard.
The touch sensitivity type and volume set in the FIXED mode will become
the common setting for all voices. However, the touch sensitivity settings
may have little or no effect with certain voices which are not normally
responsive to keyboard dynamics (Refer to the Voice Descriptions on
page 41).
Transposition
Use the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button while holding the [TRANS-
POSE] button to transpose down or up as required. The transposition
range is from “–12” (down one octave) through “0” (normal pitch) to
“12” (up one octave). The amount of transposition appears on the LED
display while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose
setting is “0”.
NOTE
The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting
other than 0 is selected.
Notes below and above the A-1 C7 range of the Clavinova sound one
octave higher and lower, respectively.
The Clavinovas TRANSPOSE function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the
entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of 12 semitones
(i.e. a maximum of one octave up or down). Transposing the pitch of the Clavinova
keyboard facilitates playing in difficult key signatures, and you can easily match the
pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instrumentalist.
TOUCH
HARD
MEDIUM
SOFT
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
/NO
+
/YES
ON
TRANSPOSE
22
CLP-950/930
Tuning
Tuning makes it possible to adjust the pitch of the Clavinova over a 427.0 Hz
453.0 Hz (corresponding to the A3 notes Hz) range in approximately 0.2
Hertz intervals. Pitch control is useful for tuning the Clavinova to match other
instruments or recorded music.
Tuning Up ...............................................................................................................
ZTo tune up (raise pitch), hold the A-1 and B-1 keys simultaneously.
XPress any key between C3 and B3. Each time a key in this range is
pressed the pitch is increased by approximately 0.2 Hz.
The [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons can also be used to tune down or up,
respectively, in
approximately
1 Hz increments. Press the [–/NO] and
[+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall standard tuning (A3 = 440
Hz).
CRelease the A-1 and B-1 keys.
Tuning Down .......................................................................................................
ZTo tune down (lower pitch), hold the A-1 and A#-1 keys simulta-
neously.
XPress any key between C3 and B3. Each time a key in this range is
pressed the pitch is decreased by approximately 0.2 Hz.
The [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons can also be used to tune down or up,
respectively, in
approximately
1 Hz increments. Press the [–/NO] and
[+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall standard tuning (A3 = 440
Hz).
CRelease the A-1 and A#-1 keys.
To Restore Standard Pitch...................................................................
ZTo restore the default pitch (A3 = 440 Hz), hold the A-1, A#-1 and
B-1 keys simultaneously.
XPress any key between C3 and B3.
(Pressing once will restore the keyboard to standard pitch, regard-
less of the amount of pitch adjustment.)
CRelease the A-1, A#-1 and B-1 keys.
In terms of “Hertz”, the overall tuning range is from 427.0 Hz to 453.0
Hz. The current tuning setting is shown on the LED display while the tuning
is being adjusted. Tenths of a Hertz are indicated on the LED display by the
appearance and position of one or two dots, as in the following example:
NOTE
An alternative tuning method is available in the Function mode page 28.
Display Value
440 440.0
4.40 440.2
44.0 440.4
440. 440.6
4.40. 440.8
C
3
B
3
A
-1
B
-1
/NO
+
/YES
A
-1
A#
-1
C
3
B
3
/NO
+
/YES
A
-1
B
-1
A#
-1
C
3
B
3
23
CLP-950/930
START/
STOP
TEMPO/FUNCTION
METRONOME
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
The Metronome & Tempo Control
The Clavinova built-in metronome is a convenient feature for practice, and it
can also provide a solid rhythmic guide when recording using the User Song
Recorder feature, described in the next section.
The Metronome
The metronome sound is alternately turned on and off by pressing
the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. When on, the beat
indicator flashes at the current tempo.
Metronome Time Signature.................................................................
The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be set by using the
[–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the METRONOME
[START/STOP] button. You can set the beat to 0, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (the
current setting appears on the LED display while the METRONOME
[START/STOP] button is held). Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons
simultaneously while holding the METRONOME [START/STOP]
button to recall the default setting “0” (no accent).
Metronome Volume Function ............................................................
The volume of the metronome sound can be adjusted via the Metro-
nome Volume function in the Function mode—page 32.
Tempo Control
The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the
recorder is described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280
beats per minute by using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons.
The selected tempo will appear on the LED display while in the normal
play mode and while the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons are
being used to adjust the tempo in the recording/playback mode. The
default tempo (120 or the recorded song tempo when the recorder
contains data and the playback track indicator is lit) can be recalled by
simultaneously pressing the [t] and [s] buttons.
Beat indicator
START/
STOP
TEMPO/FUNCTION
METRONOME
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
/NO
+
/YES
TEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
24
CLP-950/930
Using the User Song Recorder
The ability to record and play back what youve played on the Clavinova
keyboard can be an effective practice aid. You can, for example, record just the
left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing back the re-
corded left-hand part. Or, since you can record up to two tracks separately, you
could record the left- and right-hand parts separately, or record both parts of a
duet and hear how they sound when played back.
The user song recorder actually records the following data:
Entire Song
Tempo Time signature (beat) Reverb type (including OFF) Effect type
Individual Tracks
Notes played Voice selection
Dual mode voices Split mode voices (CLP-950)
Damper pedal Soft pedal
Sostenuto pedal (not recorded as an initial setting)
Effect depth Reverb depth
Dual balance (F3) Dual detune (F3) Dual octave shift (F3)
Split balance (F4: CLP-950) Split octave shift (F4: CLP-950)
Recording
Make All Necessary Initial Settings ...........................................
Before actually beginning to record, select the voice you want to
record with (or voices if you will be using the dual or split mode). You
might also want to set the volume and tempo controls.
Engage the Record Ready Mode ..................................................
Press the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode (recording
does not actually start yet). The record ready mode can be disengaged
before recording by pressing the [REC] button a second time.
The record ready mode cannot be engaged while the demo/preset song
mode is engaged.
Select the Record Track ..........................................................................
When the record mode is engaged in the previous step, the last-
recorded track will automatically be selected for recording and its indica-
tor — i.e. the TRACK [1] or [2] button indicator — will glow red. If you
want to record on a different track, press the appropriate track button so
that its indicator glows red.
The track button indicators of tracks which contain previously recorded data
will glow green (unless the track is turned off as described below). The
previously-recorded data on the non-record track will normally be played
back as you record, so you can play along with a previously-recorded track.
If you dont want to hear the previously recorded track as you record (when
you want to record a song different from what you recorded on the previous
track etc.,), press the playback track button before pressing the [REC]
button (step 1, above) so that its indicator goes out.
Recording on a track which already contains data will erase all previous
data on that track.
When the record mode is engaged the amount of memory available for
recording will be shown on the LED display in approximate kilobytes
(starting at 50), and the rightmost dot on the LED display will flash at the
current METRONOME tempo setting.
CLP-950
VOICE
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
E. PIANO
1
E. PIANO
2
HARPSI-
CHORD
VIBRA-
PHONE
CHURCH
ORGAN
JA
Z
OR
G
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
25
CLP-950/930
Using the User Song Recorder
Start Recording................................................................................................
Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the
keyboard or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The current
measure number will appear on the display while recording.
The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop recording via the Left
Pedal Mode function described on pages 31 (CLP-930) and 32 (CLP-
950).
If the metronome was on when you started recording, youll be able to
keep time with the metronome while recording, but the metronome sound
will not be recorded.
You can record up to a maximum of about 10,000 notes on the Clavinova,
depending on pedal usage and other factors. The record track indicator
will begin to flash when recorder memory is almost full. If the memory
becomes full during recording,
FUL
will appear on the display and
recording will stop automatically. (All recorded data up to that point will be
retained.)
Stop Recording ................................................................................................
Press either the [REC] or SONG [START/STOP] button to stop
recording.
The indicator of the recorded track will glow green to indicate that it
now contains data.
Erasing a Single Track ..............................................................................
All data can be erased from either of the recorders tracks by engag-
ing the record mode, selecting the track you want to erase, and then
pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button twice without recording
any data.
Changing the Initial Settings.............................................................
The initial voice, tempo, reverb type, reverb depth, and effect settings
made in step 1 of the recording procedure are actually recorded by the
Clavinova.
These initial settings can be changed after the recording is finished by
pressing the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode, pressing the
appropriate track button, making the required changes, and then pressing
the [REC] button again to exit from the record ready mode and register
the changes.
If you do this, be careful not to press the SONG [START/STOP]
button or a key on the keyboard, either of which will start recording and
erase all previous recorded data on the selected track.
It is possible to cancel the operation even after changes have been
made: change tracks and then press the [REC] button to exit from the
record mode (this also cancels data for the entire song).
The following data for initial settings cannot be changed: Dual balance
(F3), Dual detune (F3), Dual octave shift (F3), Split balance (F4:CLP-
950) or Split octave shift (F4:CLP-950).
Press twice.
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
26
CLP-950/930
Playback
To play back what you’ve recorded, first make sure that the green track indica-
tors of the tracks you want to play are lit. If not, press the corresponding track
button(s) so that they are lit. Then press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Playback starts from the beginning of the recorded data, and will stop automati-
cally at the end of the recorded data. You can also stop playback at any time by
pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.
To mute a track so that it doesn’t play back, press the corresponding track
button so that its indicator goes out (press again to turn the track back on).
The current measure number appears on the display during playback.
It is possible to play along on the keyboard during playback. In this case, the playback
voice and the voice you play on the keyboard are not the same. The playback voice is
the voice that was set when the data was recorded. The voice you play on the keyboard
is the voice that is selected on the panel.
The playback volume and tempo can be adjusted by using the [MASTER VOLUME]
control and [TEMPO/FUNCTION
,
] buttons (press both [TEMPO/FUNCTION
,
]
buttons simultaneously to recall the default tempo).
All user song recorder data will be retained in memory for about one week after the
power is turned off. If you want to keep your recorded data for longer periods, turn the
power on for a few minutes at least once a week. It is also possible to store it to an
external MIDI storage device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 by using the
Bulk Data Dump function described on page 35.
The track indicators will not light automatically when the power is turned on even if the
user song recorder contains data. It is therefore necessary to press the track buttons so
that the corresponding green indicators light before starting recorder playback. It is also
a good idea to press the track buttons to check if the tracks contain data before
recording. If the green indicator lights when the corresponding track button is pressed,
that track contains data which will be erased and replaced by the newly-recorded data.
If the metronome is being used during playback, the metronome will automatically stop
when playback is stopped.
During recorder playback, the volume of a track which is turned off will always be 0
(i.e. the Preset Song Part Cancel Volume function page 32 only affects preset
song playback.
The playback data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector.
Playback cannot be started when the demo/preset song mode is engaged.
Playback cannot be started when the recorder contains no data, or when both track
buttons are off.
If the REVERB type is changed via the panel controls during playback, both the
playback and keyboard reverb effects will be changed.
If the EFFECT type is changed via the panel controls during playback, the playback
effect may be switched off in some cases.
When the Synchro Start function is engaged, recorder playback will begin
automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard.
To engage the Synchro Start function press the SONG [START/STOP] button
while holding a track button which is ON. The rightmost dot on the display will
flash at the current tempo. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Syncro
Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the key-
board.
If you hold a track button which is OFF while pressing the SONG [START/STOP]
button, that track will be turned ON and the Synchro Start mode will be engaged.
Synchro Start ............................................................................................................................
Left Pedal Start/Stop .........................................................................................................
The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop recorder playback via the “Left Pedal
Mode” function described on pages 31 (CLP-930) and 32 (CLP-950). This is conve-
nient for starting playback of the recorded part anytime after you have started playing.
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
ESET
O
NG
TRACK
1
TRACK
2
START/
STOP
REC
SONG
TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG
Using the User Song Recorder
27
CLP-950/930
The Function Mode
The [FUNCTION] button provides access to a range of functions that give the
Clavinova extraordinary versatility. The functions are categorized in groups as
follows:
CLP-930 CLP-950
F1 F1 Tuning ............................................................. 28
F2 F2 Scale ............................................................... 28
F3 F3 Dual Mode Functions .................................... 29
F4 Split Mode Functions .................................... 30
F4 Left Pedal Mode ............................................. 31
F5 Pedal Functions ............................................. 32
F5 F6 Metronome Volume ........................................ 32
F6 F7 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume.................. 32
F7 F8 MIDI Functions ............................................... 33
F8 F9 Backup Functions.......................................... 36
To Select a Function ...........................................................................
ZPress the [FUNCTION] button so that its indicator lights.
NOTE
Functions cannot be selected during demo/preset song playback or when
the user song recorder is in operation.
XUse the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired
function: F1 through F8 on the CLP-930; F1 through F9 on the
CLP-950.
CIn the case of the Scale (F2), Dual Mode (F3), Split Mode (F4:
CLP-950), Pedal Functions (F5: CLP-950), MIDI (F7: CLP-930,
F8: CLP-950), and Backup (F8: CLP-930, F9: CLP-950) functions,
you will have to press the [+/YES] button once to enter the respec-
tive sub-mode after the function has been selected, and then use the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons again to select the desired
sub-function.
NOTE
The Dual or Split (CLP-950) mode must be engaged before the F3 and
F4 functions can be selected, respectively. If the corresponding mode is
not engaged,
F3.-
or
F4.-
will appear on the display and the corre-
sponding sub-mode will not be available.
The Dual mode can be engaged while in the Function mode, but the
Function mode must be exited before the Split mode (CLP-950) can be
engaged.
VSet the function as required by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons (see the individual function descriptions, below).
NOTE
After selecting the function, the current setting will be displayed when the
[/NO] or [+/YES] button is pressed for the first time.
BPress the [FUNCTION] button so that its indicator goes out to exit
from the function mode.
Operation Example
(sub-mode)
Press [+/YES]
Use [TEMPO/
FUNCTION t, s]
Use [/NO], [+/YES]
Press [/NO] or [+/YES]
once
ON
FUNCTION
START/
STOP
TEMPO/FUNCTION
METRONOME
ON
FUNCTION
START/
STOP
TEMPO/FUNCTION
METRONOME
28
CLP-950/930
The Function Mode
F1
Tuning
F2
Scale
In addition to the tuning method described on page 22, overall tuning can also be accom-
plished via the F1 function.
After selecting “F1”, use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower or raise the pitch in
approximately 0.2 Hz increments (the first time the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button is pressed
simply switches to the tuning value display without actually changing the tuning). The overall
tuning range is from 427.0 Hz to 453.0 Hz (corresponding to the A3 note’s Hz). Press the
[–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default value “440 Hz”.
Tenths of a Hertz are indicated on the LED display by the appearance and position of one
or two dots, as in the following example:
After selecting “F2.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale function sub-mode,
then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired scale function, as
listed below.
Display Value
440 440.0
4.40 440.2
44.0 440.4
440. 440.6
4.40. 440.8
F2.1: Scale ..........................................................................................................................................................
In addition to the standard Equal Temperament tuning, the Clavinova includes 6 classic
tunings that you can select and use to play music of the corresponding period, or experiment
with in a more modern context. The tunings are:
1: Equal Temperament 5: Mean Tone
2: Pure Major 6: Werckmeister
3: Pure Minor 7: Kirnberger
4: Pythagorean
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the number of the desired tuning. Press the
[–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default settings (Equal Temperament
tuning).
F2.2: Base Note.............................................................................................................................................
Unlike Equal Temperament tuning, these classic tunings must be tuned to a specific key.
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the key you want the previously selected tuning
to be based. The selected key will appear on the display, followed by a low bar if flat (e.g.
A_”) or a high bar if sharp (e.g. “F~”).
Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default settings “C”.
NOTE
The base note setting is effective for tunings other than the Equal Temperament tuning.
29
CLP-950/930
F3
Dual Mode Functions
After selecting “F3.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the dual-mode function sub-
mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired dual mode
function, as listed below.
If the Dual mode is not engaged “F3.-” will appear instead of “F3.Y” and the Dual mode
functions cannot be selected. If this happens engage the Dual mode and proceed.
SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the dual-mode functions (F3) by pressing the
[FUNCTION] button while holding the two dual-mode voice selectors.
NOTE
Dual mode function settings are set individually for each voice combination.
F3.1: Dual Balance.....................................................................................................................................
The volume levels of the two voices combined in the dual mode can be adjusted as re-
quired by using this function. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to adjust the balance as
required. The balance range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “10” produces equal balance
between the two dual-mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of the 2nd Voice
in relation to the 1st Voice, and settings above “10” increase the volume of the 1st Voice in
relation to the 2nd Voice (“1st” and “2nd” is explained on page 16). Press the [–/NO] and [+/
YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combina-
tion).
You can set one voice as the main voice, and another voice as a softer, mixed voice.
F3.2: Dual Detune .......................................................................................................................................
This function makes it possible to detune the 1st and 2nd dual-mode Voices to create a
thicker sound. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the amount of detuning as required.
The detune range is from –10 through 10. A setting of “0” sets both voices to the same pitch.
“+” values raise the pitch of the 1st voice while lowering the pitch of the 2nd voice, and “-”
values raise the pitch of the 2nd voice while lowering the pitch of the 1st voice. (“1st” and
“2nd” is explained on page 16). Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to
recall the default setting (different for each voice combination).
NOTE
The maximum amount of pitch variation increases toward the lower key range (
±
60 cents at the A-1
key), and decreases toward the higher key range (
±
5 cents at the C7 key). 100 cents = 1 semitone.
F3.3: 1st Voice Octave Shift .............................................................................................................
F3.4: 2nd Voice Octave Shift ...........................................................................................................
Depending on which voices you combine using the dual mode, the combination may sound
better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an octave. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to set the octave of the 1st or 2nd Voice as required (“1st” and “2nd” is explained on
page 16). The available settings are “0” for normal pitch, “–1” to shift the pitch down one
octave, and “1” to shift the pitch up one octave. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simul-
taneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination).
The Function Mode
30
CLP-950/930
F4.2: Split Balance.....................................................................................................................................
The volume levels of the two voices combined in the split mode can be adjusted as re-
quired by using this function. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to adjust the balance as
required. The balance range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “10” produces equal balance
between the two split-mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of the Left Voice
in relation to the Right Voice, and settings above “10” increase the volume of the Right Voice
in relation to the Left Voice. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall
the default setting (different for each voice combination).
F3.5: 1st Voice Effect Depth.............................................................................................................
F3.6: 2nd Voice Effect Depth ...........................................................................................................
These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for the 1st and
2nd dual-mode Voices (“1st” and “2nd” is explained on page 16). Use the [–/NO] and [+/
YES] buttons to set the effect depth for the corresponding voice as required. The depth range
is from 0 through 20. A setting of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces
maximum effect depth. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the
default setting (different for each voice combination).
NOTE
The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the EFFECT is ON. The Function mode must be
exited before EFFECT can be turned ON.
F3.7: Reset..........................................................................................................................................................
This function resets all dual-mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES]
button to reset the values. “End” will appear on the display when all functions have been
reset.
F4
CLP-950 Split Mode Functions
After selecting “F4.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the split-mode function sub-
mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired split mode
function, as listed below.
If the Split mode is not engaged “F4.-” will appear instead of “F4.Y” and the Split mode
functions cannot be selected. Also note that you must exit from the Function mode before the
Split mode can be engaged.
SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the split-mode functions (F4) by pressing the
[FUNCTION] button while holding the [SPLIT] button.
NOTE
Split mode function settings are set individually for each voice combination.
F4.1: Split Point .............................................................................................................................................
In addition to the split point setting method described on page 17, the split point can be set
via this function. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the split point as required, or
simply press the appropriate key on the keyboard: from “A-1” to “C7”. Press the [–/NO] and
[+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “F#2”.
The Function Mode
31
CLP-950/930
F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift.......................................................................................................
F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift...........................................................................................................
Depending on which voices you combine using the split mode, the combination may sound
better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an octave. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to set the octave of the Left or Right Voice as required. The available settings are “0”
for normal pitch, “–1” to shift the pitch down one octave, and “1” to shift the pitch up one
octave. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting
(different for each voice combination).
Set according to the pitch extent for the song you want to play.
F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth ......................................................................................................
F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth...........................................................................................................
These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for the Left and
Right split-mode Voices. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the effect depth for the
corresponding voice as required. The depth range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “0”
produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum effect depth. Press the [–/NO]
and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice
combination).
NOTE
The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the EFFECT is ON. The Function mode must be
exited before EFFECT can be turned ON.
F4.7: Damper Range ................................................................................................................................
The Damper Range function determines whether the damper pedal affects the Right Voice,
the Left Voice, or both the Left and Right Voices in the split mode. Use the [–/NO] and [+/
YES] buttons to select “2” for the Left Voice, “1” for the Right Voice, or “ALL” for both
voices. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting
“ALL”.
F4.8: Reset..........................................................................................................................................................
This function resets all split-mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES]
button to reset the values. “End” will appear on the display when all functions have been
reset.
This function sets the left pedal for normal soft-pedal operation or for song start/stop
operation. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the desired left-pedal mode. “1” is
the normal soft-pedal mode, and “2” is the start/stop mode. When the start/stop mode is
selected, the left pedal functions in the same way as the panel SONG [START/STOP] button.
Press the
[–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “1”.
F4
CLP-930 Left Pedal Mode
The Function Mode
32
CLP-950/930
F6
CLP-950 Metronome Volume
The volume of the metronome sound can be changed. After selecting “F5” or “F6”, use
the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the metronome volume as required. The volume range
is from 1 through 20. A setting of “1” produces minimum sound, while a setting of “20”
produces maximum metronome volume. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simulta-
neously to recall the default setting “10”.
F5
CLP-930 Metronome Volume
F5
CLP-950 Pedal Functions
After selecting “F5.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the pedal functions sub-mode,
then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired pedal functions, as
listed below.
F6
CLP-930 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume
This function sets the volume at which a “canceled” part is played during preset song
playback (see page 15 for information on the “part-cancel” function). Use the [–/NO] and [+/
YES] buttons to set the volume as required. The volume range is from 0 through 20. A setting
of “0” produces no sound, while a setting of “20” produces maximum volume. Press the [–/
NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “5”.
Adjust the part volume to a comfortable level to use the “canceled” part as a guide to play
along with. Set to “0” if you don’t want to hear the part.
SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the metronome functions by pressing the [FUNC-
TION] button while holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.
F5.1: Left Pedal Mode.............................................................................................................................
This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal for normal soft pedal operation, or for
song start/stop operation. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the desired left-
pedal mode. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default
setting “1”.
1: Soft The left pedal functions as the soft pedal.
2: Start/Stop The left pedal functions in the same manner as the SONG [START/STOP] button.
F5.2: Sustain Sample Depth............................................................................................................
The CLP-950 GRAND PIANO 1 voice features special “Sustain Samples” which recreate the
unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is
pressed. This function lets you adjust the depth of this effect. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to set the effect depth as required. The effect depth range is from 0 through 20. A setting
of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum effect depth. Press the [–/
NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “12”.
F7
CLP-950 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume
The Function Mode
33
CLP-950/930
F8
CLP-950 MIDI Functions
A Brief Introduction to MIDI
MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-
standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible
musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and
control one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of
MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and
control than is available with isolated instruments. For example, most
MIDI keyboards (including the Clavinova, of course) transmit note
and velocity (touch response) information via the MIDI OUT connector whenever a note is played on the
keyboard. If the MIDI OUT connector is connected to the MIDI IN connector of a second keyboard (synthesizer,
etc.) or a tone generator (essentially a synthesizer with no keyboard), the second keyboard or tone generator will
respond precisely to notes played on the original transmitting keyboard. The result is that you can effectively
play two instruments at once, providing thick multi-instrument sounds.
This same type of musical information transfer is used for MIDI
sequence recording. A sequence recorder can be used to “record”
MIDI data received from a Clavinova, for example. When the
recorded data is played back, the Clavinova automatically “plays”
the recorded performance in precise detail.
The examples given above really only scratch the surface. MIDI
can do much, much more. The Clavinova MIDI functions allow it to
be used in fairly sophisticated MIDI systems.
DOU-10
MIDI Cable
MIDI INMIDI OUT
Clavinova
DOU-10
Clavinova
Data Being Recorded
Playback Data
MIDI IN MIDI INMIDI OUTMIDI OUT
After selecting “F7.Y” or “F8.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI function sub-
mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired MIDI function, as
listed below.
NOTE
The bottom-panel HOST SELECT switch must be set to MIDI in order to use the MIDI connectors. When you
use the TO HOST connector, set the HOST SELECT switch to the appropriate position for the type of computer
you are using (see page 37). In this situation, all MIDI settings described below will have affect on the MIDI
signal in and out of the TO HOST connector.
Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables longer
than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors.
F7
CLP-930 MIDI Functions
F7.1/F8.1: MIDI Transmit Channel Selection ..............................................................................
F7.2/F8.2: MIDI Receive Channel Selection................................................................................
The MIDI system allows transmission
and reception of MIDI data on 16 differ-
ent channels. Multiple channels have
been implemented to allow selective
control of certain instruments or devices
connected in series. For example, a single
MIDI sequence recorder could be used to “play” two different instruments or tone generators. One of
the instruments or tone generators could be set to receive only on channel 1, while the other is set to
receive on channel 2. In this situation the first instrument or tone generator will respond only to
channel-1 information transmitted by the sequence recorder, while the second instrument or tone
generator will respond only to channel-2 information. This allows the sequence recorder to “play”
two completely different parts on the receiving instruments or tone generators.
Tone Generator
MIDI IN
MIDI IN MIDI THRU
DOU-10
MIDI OUT
Clavinova
(Set to receive on MIDI channel 1)
(Set to receive on MIDI
channel 2)
The Function Mode
34
CLP-950/930
In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must
be matched for proper data transfer. A “Multi-timbre” receive mode is also available, which allows
simultaneous reception of different parts on all 16 MIDI channels, allowing the Clavinova to play
multi-channel song data received from a music computer or sequencer. There’s also a “1-2” mode
which allows simultaneous reception on channels 1 and 2.
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the desired transmit or receive channel. The trans-
mit channel parameter can also be turned “OFF” if you don’t want the Clavinova to transmit any
MIDI data. To select the multi-timbre receive mode, set the receive channel to “ALL”. Select “1-2”
for multi-timbre reception on channels 1 and 2 only.
Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting: transmit = “1”;
receive = “ALL”.
NOTE
In the dual mode first voice data is transmitted on its set channel, and in the split mode right voice data is
transmitted on its set channel. In the dual mode second voice data is transmitted on the next greater channel
number of the set channel, and in the split mode left voice data is transmitted on the next greater channel
number of the set channel. In either mode, no data is transmitted if the transmit channel is set to OFF.
Demo/preset song data and recorder playback data are not transmitted via MIDI.
No MIDI reception occurs when the demo/preset song mode is engaged.
Program change and other like channel messages received will not affect the Clavinovas panel settings or
what is being played on the keyboard.
F7.3/F8.3: Local Control ON/OFF...........................................................................................................
“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the
Clavinova keyboard controls its internal tone generator,
allowing the internal voices to be played directly from
the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control On”
since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by
its own keyboard.
Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the Clavinova keyboard does not play the
internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connec-
tor when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to
MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector.
When using the DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit with the Clavinova, for example, Local Control
should be turned OFF when recording using the DOU-10 voices only, and ON when recording the
Clavinova voices while listening to playback of the DOU-10 voices.
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn local control “On” or “OFF”.
Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “On”.
DOU-10
OUT PUT
R
L
AUX IN
L
RMIDI OUT
MIDI
IN
Clavinova
F7.4/F8.4: Program Change ON/OFF .................................................................................................
Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an exter-
nal keyboard or other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly numbered voice to be selected on
the corresponding channel (the keyboard voice does not change). The Clavinova will normally also
send a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspond-
ingly numbered voice or program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to
receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers.
This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so
that voices can be selected on the Clavinova without affecting the external MIDI device.
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn program change transmission and reception “On” or
“OFF”.
Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “On”.
NOTE
For information on program change numbers for each of the Clavinovas voices, refer to page 44 in the MIDI
Data Format section.
The Function Mode
35
CLP-950/930
F7.5/F8.5: Control Change ON/OFF.........................................................................................
Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI control change data received from an exter-
nal MIDI device or keyboard, causing the voice on the corresponding channel to be affected
by pedal and other “control” settings received from the controlling device (the keyboard voice
is not affected). The Clavinova also transmits MIDI control change information when one of
its pedals or other appropriate controls are operated.
This function makes it possible to cancel control change data reception and transmission so
that, for example, the Clavinova pedals and other controls can be operated without affecting an
external MIDI device.
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn control change transmission and reception
“On” or “OFF”.
Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “On”.
NOTE
For information on control changes that can be used with the Clavinova, refer to the MIDI Data Format
on page 43.
F7.6/F8.6: MIDI Transmit Transpose ........................................................................................
This function allows the MIDI note data transmitted by the Clavinova to be transposed up
or down in semitone increments by up to plus or minus 12 semitones. The pitch of the
Clavinova itself is not affected.
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the desired amount of MIDI transmit transposi-
tion. The range is from “–12” (down one octave) through “0” (no transposition) to “12” (up
one octave).
Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “0”.
F7.7/F8.7: Panel/Status Transmit ................................................................................................
This function causes all the current Clavinova panel settings (selected voice, etc.) to be
transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal. This is particularly useful if you will be recording
performances to a MIDI sequence recorder such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 which
will be used to control the Clavinova on playback. By transmitting the Clavinova panel set-
tings and recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to the actual performance data,
the Clavinova will be automatically restored to the same settings when the performance is
played back.
Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status data. “End” will appear on the LED
display when the data has been successfully transmitted.
NOTE
See page 44 for list of the Panel Data Contents transmitted by this function.
Panel setting data that is transmitted to an external device can only be reloaded on a model of the
same type. Panel setting data can also be directly transferred to or from instruments of the same
model type.
F7.8/F8.8: Bulk Data Dump ...............................................................................................................
This function is used to transmit all data stored in the Recorder memory to a MIDI data
storage device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3, other sequence recorders, or MIDI
compatible computers.
Press the [+/YES] button to begin bulk transmission. “End” will appear on the LED
display when the data has been successfully transmitted.
NOTE
User song recorder data that is transmitted to an external device can only be reloaded on a model of
the same type. Recorder data can also be directly transferred to or from instruments of the same
model type.
The reload operation cannot be executed when the demo/preset song mode or user song recorder is
in operation, or when the Function mode is engaged.
No MIDI note/panel data transmission or data reception occurs during a bulk data dump transmit operation.
The Function Mode
36
CLP-950/930
F9
CLP-950 Backup Functions
After selecting “F8.Y” or “F9.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the backup function
sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired backup
function, as listed below.
NOTE
The backup settings themselves, and the contents of the user song recorder memory, are always
backed up.
Even if the Backup is turned on, factory presets can be recalled at any time (see page 40). The factory
setting list is found on page 42.
Even if backup is turned on via one of the functions described below, the data will only be
retained in memory for about 1 week if the power is not turned on during this time. If the
backup period is exceeded, all settings will be reset to their default values. If you want to
retain the backup settings for longer periods, be sure to turn the power switch on for a few
minutes at least once a week.
F8.2/F9.2: MIDI................................................................................................................................................
Turns backup of the MIDI functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”.
The default backup mode is “OFF”.
Channel (Transmit, Receive) Local ON/OFF
Program Change ON/OFF Control Change ON/OFF
MIDI Transmit Transpose
F8.3/F9.3: Tuning..........................................................................................................................................
Turns backup of the tuning functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”.
The default backup mode is “OFF”.
Transpose Tuning Scale (including base note)
F8.4/F9.4: Pedal.............................................................................................................................................
Turns backup of the pedal functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”.
The default backup mode is “OFF”.
Left Pedal Mode Sustain Sample Depth (CLP-950)
F8.1/F9.1: Voice..............................................................................................................................................
Turns backup of the voice functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”.
The default backup mode is “OFF”.
Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split: CLP-950)
Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each voice combination)
Split (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Functions for each voice combination : CLP-950)
Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)
Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)
Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume)
Metronome (Beat, Volume)
Preset Song Part Cancel Volume
F8
CLP-930 Backup Functions
The Function Mode
37
CLP-950/930
Connecting to a Personal Computer
Although the Clavinova can be connected to a personal computer via the
MIDI IN/OUT connectors and a MIDI interface, the TO HOST connector and
HOST SELECT switch allow direct connection to Apple Macintosh or IBM-PC/AT
personal computers for sequencing and other music applications without the
need for a separate MIDI interface.
Connect the TO HOST connector of the Clavinova to the modem or
printer port on your Macintosh, depending on which port your MIDI
software is using for MIDI data communication, using a standard
Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable. Set the HOST SELECT
switch to the “Mac” position.
You may also have to make other MIDI interface settings on the
computer side, depending on the type of software you use (refer to your
software owners manual). In any case the clock speed should be set to
1 MHz.
Connecting to an Apple Macintosh Series
Computer
................................................................................................................
Mac Cable Connections
2 (HSK i)1
1 (HSK 0)2
5 (RxD-)3
MINI DIN
8-PIN
4 GND4
3 (TxD-)5
8 (RxD+)6
7 (GP i)7
6 (TxD+)8
MINI DIN
8-PIN
8-pin system peripheral cable.
Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps.
NOTE
When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn the power to both the Clavinova and the computer
OFF before connecting the cable and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After connecting the cable and making the
appropriate HOST SELECT switch setting, turn the power to the computer on first, then turn on the Clavinova.
When not using the [TO HOST] terminal of the Clavinova, make sure the cable is disconnected from the [TO HOST]
terminal. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.
•“
HS(
will appear in the display if the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is not properly con-
nected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active. In
this case, turn the power off on both the Clavinova and the computer, and check the cable connection and the
position of the HOST SELECT switch. Once the connection and HOST SELECT switch position is verified, turn the
power of the computer on first, then the Clavinova, to check if the MIDI driver and MIDI application function properly.
When the HOST SELECT switch is set to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2, no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors.
To use the MIDI connectors for connection via a standard MIDI interface, set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI.
HOST SELECTTO HOST
MIDIMac
PC-2PC-1
Apple Macintosh
Series Computer
Set to the Mac position.
CLP-930
The Clavinova-Computer Connection is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for
beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a
Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document
is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address:
Clavinova Home Page:
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
38
CLP-950/930
Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ............
Connect the TO HOST connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port
on your IBM computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN 9-pin D-SUB
cross cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2” position.
Refer to your software owners manual for information on any
settings you might have to make on the computer side.
Connecting to a Personal Computer
PC-2 Cable Connections
8 (CTS)1
7 (RST)2
2 (RxD)3
4 5 (GND)
8
3 (TxD) 5
MINI DIN
8-PIN
D-SUB
9-PIN
8-pin mini DIN
9-pin D-SUB cable.
Data transfer rate: 38,400 bps.
Connector Pin Numbers
1
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
34
678
5
2
MINI DIN 8-PIN
D-SUB 9-PIN
NOTE
If your system doesnt work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require
different settings. Check your software operation manual and if it requires a 31,250 bps. data transfer rate, set the
HOST SELECT switch to PC-1.
When using the TO HOST terminal to connect to a personal computer using Windows, a Yamaha MIDI driver must
be installed in the personal computer. The Yamaha MIDI driver can be obtained at Yamahas home page on the
World Wide Web, <http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/xg/>.
HOST SELECTTO HOST
MIDIMac
PC-2PC-1
IBM-PC/AT
Series Computer
Set to the PC-2 position.
CLP-930
39
CLP-950/930
Connecting to a Personal Computer
Using a USB Interface (such as the Yamaha UX256)
Connect the USB interface (Yamaha UX256 or equivalent) to your
computer using a USB cable. Install the driver software supplied with
the interface (or other appropriate driver software) on your computer
according to the supplied instructions. Connect your instrument to the
USB interface using either a standard Macintosh 8-pin system periph-
eral cable or MIDI cables. Refer to the manual supplied with your USB
interface for details.
Computer
USB cable
UX256 or equivalent
Clavinova
MIDI cables
MIDI
INOUT
HOST SELECT
MIDI
Connecting the USB Interface and Instrument via a Serial Cable
Connecting the USB Interface and Instrument via MIDI Cables
Computer
USB cable
UX256 or equivalent
Mini-DIN 8-pin
or
Clavinova
HOST SELECT
PC-1
HOST SELECT
Mac
Standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable
40
CLP-950/930
Factory Preset Recall
Options & Expander Modules
Options
BC-8 Bench
A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha
Clavinova.
HPE-160 Stereo Headphones
High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones
with extra-soft ear pads.
All dual mode, split mode, reverb, effect, touch sensitivity, tuning
settings, and the settings affected by the Backup Functions can be
restored to their original factory preset values by holding the C7 key
(rightmost key on the keyboard) while turning the [POWER] switch
ON. This also erases all recorder data, and sets all Backup on/off
settings (F8: CLP-930, F9: CLP-950) to “OFF”.
NOTE
The factory setting list is found on page 42.
Troubleshooting
If you encounter what appears to be a malfunction, please check the following points before assuming
that your Clavinova is faulty.
1. No Sound When the Power is Turned ON
Is the AC plug properly connected to the Clavinova
and an AC wall outlet? Check the AC connection
carefully. Is the CLP-950 speaker cord properly
plugged into the connector? (page 50) Is the MAS-
TER VOLUME control turned up to a reasonable
listening level?
Also make sure that a pair of headphones is not
plugged into the PHONES jack, and that the Local
Control (page 34) is ON.
2. The Damper Pedal Doesnt Work
If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sus-
tained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure
that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the main
unit (page 58: CLP-930, page 50: CLP-950).
3. The Clavinova Reproduces Radio or TV
Sound
This can occur if there is a high-power transmitter in
your vicinity. Contact your Yamaha dealer.
4. Intermittent Static Noise
This is usually due to turning ON or OFF a household
appliance or other electronic equipment which is fed
by the same AC mains line as your Clavinova.
5. Interference Appears On Radio or TV Sets
Located Near the Clavinova
The Clavinova contains digital circuitry which can
generate radio-frequency noise. The solution is to
move the Clavinova further away from the affected
equipment, or vice versa.
6. Noise is heard from the Clavinovas speak-
ers.
The noise may be due to interference caused by the
use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the
Clavinova.
Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away
from the Clavinova.
7. Distorted Sound When the Clavinova is
Connected to An External Amplifier/Speaker
System
If the Clavinova is connected to a stereo system or
instrument amplifier and the sound is distorted,
reduce the volume of the external equipment to a
level at which the distortion ceases.
If Scn appears on the display an internal
malfunction has occurred. In this case,
contact your Yamaha dealer.
Expander Modules
DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit
A range of MIDI recording and playback func-
tions, plus Yamaha DOC software, Disklavier
PianoSoft™, and General MIDI/Standard MIDI File
disk playback capability.
POWER
41
CLP-950/930
Voice
CLP- CLP- Stereo/
Touch
Dynamic
Voice Descriptions
950 930 Mono
Response Sampling*
Newly-recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that
requires acoustic piano.
Neu aufgezeichnete Samples eines echten Konzertflügels. Perfekt für klassische Kompositionen sowie viele andere
Musikrichtungen, für die ein akustischer Klavierklang wichtig ist.
Nouveaux échantillons enregistrés d’un vrai piano de concert. Parfaits pour les compositions classiques comme pour tout
autre style nécessitant un piano acoustique.
Muestras nuevas grabadas en un piano de cola para conciertos. Son perfectas para composiciones clásicas así como
para otros estilos que requieren piano acústico.
Newly-recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also includes dynamic sampling, sustain samples, and key-off
samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other
style that requires acoustic piano.
Neu aufgezeichnete Samples eines echten Konzertflügels. Mit “Dynamic Sampling”, “Sustain Samples” und “Key-off
Samples” für einen außergewöhnlich realistischen Konzertflügelklang. Perfekt für klassische Kompositionen sowie viele
andere Musikrichtungen, für die ein akustischer Klavierklang wichtig ist.
Échantillons nouvellement enregistrés à partir d’un vrai piano à queue de concert. Inclus également des échantillons
dynamique, sustain et hors touche destinés à produire une sonorité acoustique réaliste d’un vrai piano à queue de
concert. Parfaits pour les compositions classiques comme pour tout autre style nécessitant un piano acoustique.
Muestras nuevas grabadas en un piano de cola para conciertos. Incluyen también muestras dinámicas, muestras de
sostenido, y muestras de soltado de cuerdas para ofrecer un sondo de piano de cola acústico muy realista. Son
perfectas para composiciones clásicas así como para otros estilos que requieren piano acústico.
A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal for rock and popular genres.
Ein heller, weiträumiger Pianosound, der sich ideal für Rock und andere populäre Musikgenres eignet.
Sonorité de piano brillante et expansive idéale pour les genres de musiques rock et populaire.
Sonido de piano claro y con expansión que es ideal para música rock y popular.
An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to
keyboard dynamics.
Ein elektronischer Pianosound, der durch FM-Synthese erzeugt wird. Äußerst “musikalische” Ansprache mit
anschlagstärkeabhängiger Klangfärbung.
Sonorité de piano électronique créée par synthèse FM. Réponse extrêmement “musicale” avec un timbre variant en
proportion de la dynamique du clavier.
Sonido de piano electrónico creado con síntesis de FM. Tiene una respuesta muy “musical” con variación del timbre de
acuerdo con la dinámica del teclado.
The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive
tone when played hard.
Der Sound eines elektrischen Pianos mit metallischen “Hammeranschlag-Spitzen”. Bei leichtem Anschlagen erhält man
einen weichen Klang, mit zunehmender Anschlagstärke einen aggressiveren Sound.
Sonorité de piano électrique se servant de “pointes” métalliques de frappe de marteau. Sonorité atténuée lorsque les
touches sont frappées légèrement et sonorité agressive lorsque le jeu est plus dur.
Sonido de piano eléctrico que usa los tonos metálicos de golpe de martillo. Es un tono suave cuando se toca con
delicadeza, y es un tono agresivo cuando se toca con fuerza.
The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There
is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released.
Cembalo, das maßgebliche Instrument der Barockmusik. Da die Saiten bei diesem Instrument angezupft werden, spricht
diese Stimme nicht auf Anschlagdynamik an. Beim Freigeben der Tasten ist jedoch ein zusätzlicher charakteristischer
Klang zu hören.
L’instrument définitif pour la musique baroque. Étant donné que la harpe se sert de cordes pincer, il n’existe aucune réponse
de touche. Cependant, cette sonorité supplémentaire caractéristique est obtenue lorsque les touches sont relâchées.
El instrumento perfecto para música barroca. Puesto que el clavicordio emplea cuerdas de punteado, no hay respuesta a
la pulsación. Sin embargo, hay un sonido característico adicional al soltar las teclas.
Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play.
Das Vibraphon wird mit relativ weichen Schlegeln gespielt. Je härter der Anschlag, um so metallischer wirkt der Klang.
Vibraphone joué avec des maillets relativement souples. La sonorité devient plus métallique au fur et à mesure que le jeu
des touches est plus dur.
Vibráfono tocado con mazos relativamente blandos. El tono pasa a ser más metálico a medida que se toca con más fuerza.
A soft pipe-organ type voice that is ideal for hymn accompaniment and other styles.
Ein sanfter pfeifenorgelähnlicher Klang, der sich ideal für Hymnenbegleitung und andere Musikstile eignet.
Voix de type orgue à tuyaux et sonorité enveloppée convenant parfaitement pour l’accompagnement d’un hymne ou
d’autres styles.
Una voz del tipo de órgano de tubos que es ideal para acompañamientos de himnos y otros estilos.
The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.
Der Sound einer “Tonewheel”-Elektroorgel. In Jazz- und Rockidiomen weit verbreitet.
Sonorité d’une molette de courbure du son de type orgue électrique. Souvent entendue dans les dialectes de jazz et de rock.
Sonido de un órgano eléctrico del tipo “rueda fónica”. Se oye normalmente en estilos de jazz y rock.
A large string ensemble. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode.
Ein großes Streicherensemble. Probieren Sie diese Stimme einmal kombiniert mit Piano im Dualmodus aus.
Grand ensemble à cordes. Essayez d’associer cette voix avec le piano en mode DUAL.
Un conjunto de instrumentos de cuerdas grande. Pruebe combinando esta voz con la de piano en el modo DUAL.
A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces.
Ein satter, reichhaltiger Klang. Perfekt zur Erzeugung voller Harmonien in Stücken mit langsamem Tempo.
Une ample et spacieuse voix de chœur. Convient parfaitement pour créer de riches harmoniques dans les passages lents.
Una voz de coros grande y espaciosa. Es perfecta para crear ricas armonías de piezas lentas.
An upright bass played fingerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin music.
Ein mit den Fingern gespielter Kontrabaß. Ideal für Jazz und lateinamerikanische Musik.
Sorte de doigté de basse droite. Convient parfaitement pour la musique de jazz et la musique latine.
Contrabajo tocado con punteado. Es ideal para jazz y música latina.
Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more.
E-Baß für eine Reihe von Musikrichtungen wie Jazz, Rock, Pop usw.
Basse électrique destinée à une vaste gamme de styles de musique de jazz, rock, populaire et autres.
Bajo eléctrico para una amplia variedad de estilos de música, jazz, rock, popular, y otros.
* Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic piano.
* “Dynamic Sampling” hält mehrere “Velocity-switched Samples” bereit, die anschlagdynamisch gesteuert wiedergegeben werden
und so die bei unterschiedlicher Anschlagstärke erzeugten klanglichen Variationen eines akustischen Instruments reproduzieren.
* L’échantillonnage dynamique procure des échantillons multiples commutés permettant de simuler avec une précision remarquable
le timbre d’un piano acoustique.
* El muestreo dinámico proporciona múltiples muestras de velocidad cambiada para simular con precisión la respuesta del timbre
de un piano acústico.
Voice Descriptions/Beschreibung der Stimmen/
Description des voix/Descripciones de las voces
Stereo
X
OO
GRAND
PIANO
Stereo
O
O
O
GRAND
PIANO 1
Stereo
XO
O
GRAND
PIANO 2
Stereo
O
O
OO
E.PIANO 1
Mono
OOOO
E.PIANO 2
Stereo
X
O
OX
HARPSI-
CHORD
Stereo
O
O
OO
VIBRA-
PHONE
Stereo
X
O
OX
CHURCH
ORGAN
Mono
X
O
X
JAZZ
ORGAN
Stereo
X
O
OO
STRINGS
Stereo
XOO
O
CHOIR
Mono
X
O
O
WOOD
BASS
E.BASS
Mono
X
O
O
42
CLP-950/930
Function
CLP-950 CLP-930
Function Default
Backup Group
CLP-950 CLP-930
F1 F1 Tuning A3=440Hz
F2.1 F2.1 Scale 1 (Equal Temperament) F9.3 F8.3
F2.2 F2.2 Base Note C
F3.1 F3.1 Dual Balance Preset for each voice combination
F3.2 F3.2 Dual Detune Preset for each voice combination
F3.3, F3.4 F3.3, F3.4 Dual Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination
F3.5, F.3.6 F3.5, F.3.6 Dual Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination
F4.1 Split Point F#2 F9.1 F8.1
F4.2 Split Balance Preset for each voice combination
F4.3, F4.4 Split Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination
F4.5, F4.6 Split Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination
F4.7 Damper Range ALL
F5.1 F4 Left Pedal Mode 1 (soft pedal)
F9.4 F8.4
F5.2 Sustain Sample Depth 12
F6 F5 Metronome Volume 10
F9.1 F8.1
F7 F6 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume 5
F8.1 F7.1 MIDI Transmit Channel 1
F8.2 F7.2 MIDI Receive Channel ALL
F8.3 F7.3 Local Control ON
F9.2 F8.2
F8.4 F7.4 Program Change Send & Receive ON
F8.5 F7.5 Control Change Send & Receive ON
F8.6 F7.6 MIDI Transmit Transpose 0
F9 F8 Backup All OFF
Always backed up Always backed up
Factory Setting List/Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen/
Liste des réglages/Lista de ajustes de fábrica
CLP-950 CLP-930
Backup Group
CLP-950 CLP-930
Voice GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO
Dual Mode OFF OFF
Split Mode OFF
Split Mode Left Voice BASS
Reverb Type Preset for each voice Preset for each voice
F9.1 F8.1
Reverb Depth Preset for each voice Preset for each voice
Effect Type Preset for each voice Preset for each voice
Effect Depth Preset for each voice Preset for each voice
Touch Sensitivity MEDIUM MEDIUM
Volume in the FIXED Mode 64 64
Metronome OFF OFF
Metronome Time Signature 0 (no accent) 0 (no accent) F9.1 F8.1
Tempo 120 120
Transpose 0 0 F9.3 F8.3
“—”: Not memorized
Voice Name
CLP-930 CLP-950
Title Composer
GRAND PIANO O Valse op.64-1 “Petit chien” F.F.Chopin
GRAND PIANO 1 O Nocturne op.9-2 F.F.Chopin
GRAND PIANO 2 O Piano Sonate op.13 “Pathétique” 2nd mov. L.v.Beethoven
E.PIANO1 O O Clair de lune C.A.Debussy
E.PIANO2 O O Scherzo-valsa (Pièces Pittoresques) E.Chabrier
HARPSICHORD O O Le Coucou L-C.Daquin
VIBRAPHONE O O Study in A minor Georges Pheiffer
CHURCH ORGAN O O Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2 G.F.Händel
JAZZ ORGAN O Trolltog (Lyriske Småstykker No.5) E.H.Grieg
STRINGS O O Brandenburgisches Konzert No.3 J.S.Bach
CHOIR O O Kantate Nr.140 J.S.Bach
WOOD BASS O L’Eléphant Saint-Saëns
E.BASS O In The Kings Hall E.H.Grieg
Voice Demo Tune Titles
Demo Song List/Verzeichnis der Demo-Songs/
Liste des morceaux de démonstration/Lista de canciones de demostración
Some of the demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts from the original compositions.
Bei manchen der oben aufgeführten Demo-Stücke handelt es sich um kurze, umgestaltete Auszüge aus den Originalkompositionen.
Certains des morceaux de démonstration cités ci-dessus sont de courts extraits arrangés des compositions originales.
Algunas de las piezas de demostración arriba mencionadas son pasajes cortos arreglados de las composiciones originales.
43
CLP-950/930
3 MODE MESSAGES
Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv]
BnH = Control event (n = channel number)
cc = Control number
vv = Data Range
(1) All Sound Off
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
78H All Sound Off 00H
Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On
and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages.
(2) Reset All Controllers
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
79H
Reset All Controllers
00H
Resets controllers as follows.
Controller Value
Expression 127 (max)
Damper Pedal 0 (off)
Sostenuto 0 (off)
Soft Pedal 0 (off)
(3) Local Control (reception only)
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
7AH Local Control 00H (off), 7FH (on)
(4) All Notes Off
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
7BH All Notes Off 00H
Switches OFF all the notes that are currently ON on the specified
channel. Any notes being held by the damper or sostenuto pedal
will continue to sound until the pedal is released.
(5) Omni Off (reception only)
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
7CH Omni Off 00H
Same processing as for All Notes Off.
(6) Omni On (reception only)
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
7DH Omni On 00H
Same processing as for All Notes Off.
(7) Mono (reception only)
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
7EH Mono 00H
Same processing as for All Sound Off.
(8) Poly (reception only)
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
7FH Poly 00H
Same processing as for All Sound Off.
When control change reception is turned OFF in the Function
mode, control change data will not be transmitted or received
except for Bank Select and Mode messages.
Local on/off, OMNI on/off are not transmitted. (The appropriate
note off number is supplied with All Note Off transmission).
When a voice bank MSB/LSB is received, the number is stored
in the internal buffer regardless of the received order, then the
stored value is used to select the appropriate voice when a
program change message is received.
The Multi-timbre and Poly modes are always active. No change
occurs when OMNI ON, OMNI OFF, MONO, or POLY mode
messages are received.
Si vous êtes très familier avec linterface MIDI ou si vous
utilisez un ordinateur pour commander votre matériel de
musique au moyen de messages MIDI générés par
ordinateur, les données suivantes vous seront utiles et vous
aideront à commander le Clavinova.
SI usted está ya familiarizado con MIDI, o si emplea una
computadora para controlar sus aparatos musicales con
mensajes MIDI generados por computadora, los datos
proporcionados en esta sección le ayudarán a controlar la
Clavinova.
If youre already very familiar with MIDI, or are using a
computer to control your music hardware with computer-
generated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section
can help you to control the Clavinova.
Falls Sie bereits mit MIDI vertraut sind oder einen Compu-
ter zur Erzeugung von MIDI-Steuermeldungen für die
Instrumente verwenden, können Sie sich zur Steuerung des
Clavinovas nach den im folgenden Abschnitt aufgeführten
Spezifikationen richten.
1. NOTE ON/OFF
Data format: [9nH] -> [kk] -> [vv]
9nH = Note ON/OFF event (n = channel number)
kk = Note number (Transmit: 09H ~ 78H = A-2 ~ C8 /
Receive: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8)*
vv = Velocity (Key ON = 01H ~ 7FH, Key OFF = 00H)
Data format: [8nH] -> [kk] -> [vv] (reception only)
8nH = Note OFF event (n = channel number)
kk = Note number: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8
vv = Velocity
* If received value exceeds the supported range for the selected
voice, the note is adjusted by the necessary number of octaves.
2. CONTROL CHANGE
Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv]
BnH = Control change (n = channel number)
cc = Control number
vv = Data Range
(1) Bank Select
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
00H Bank Select MSB 00H:Normal
20H Bank Select LSB 00H...7FH
Bank selection processing does not occur until receipt of next
Program Change message.
(2) Main Volume (reception only)
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
07H Volume MSB 00H...7FH
(3) Expression
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
0BH Expression MSB 00H...7FH
(4) Damper
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
40H Damper MSB 00H...7FH
(5) Sostenuto
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
42H Sostenuto 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on
(6) Soft Pedal
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
43H Soft Pedal 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on
(7) Effect1 Depth ( Reverb Send Level )
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
5BH Effect1 Depth 00H...7FH
Adjusts the reverb send level.
(8) Effect4 Depth ( Variation Effect Send Level )
ccH Parameter Data Range (vvH)
5EH Effect4 Depth 00H...7FH
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/
Format des données MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI
44
CLP-950/930
• Panel Data Contents
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format des données MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI
4. PROGRAM CHANGE
Data format: [CnH] -> [ppH]
CnH = Program event (n = channel number)
ppH = Program change number
5. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES
[rrH]
F8H: Timing clock
FAH: Start
FCH: Stop
FEH: Active sensing
Data Transmission Reception
F8H Transmitted every Received as 96-clock tempo timing
96 clocks when MIDI clock is set to External
FAH Recorder start Recorder start
Not received when the MIDI clock
is set to Internal.
FCH Recorder stop Recorder stop
Not received when the MIDI clock
is set to Internal.
FEH Transmitted every If a signal is not received via MIDI
200 milliseconds for more than 400 milliseconds, the
same processing will take place for
All Sound Off, All Notes Off and
Reset All Controllers as when those
signals are received.
Caution: If an error occurs during MIDI reception, the Damper, Sostenuto,
and Soft effects for all channels are turned off and an All Note Off occurs.
6. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES
(Yamaha MIDI Format)
Panel Data Transmit
Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [7CH] -> ... ->
[F7H]
F0H, 43H, 0nH, 7CH (n: channel number)
00H, 2AH (
data length
)
43H, 4CH, 20H, 20H (CL)
43H, 4CH, 50H, 27H, 30H, 30H (CLP-950/930)
30H, 30H (version x, y)
[PANEL DATA]
[CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-(43H+4CH+20H+......+Data end)
F7H
When program change reception is turned OFF in the Function
mode, no program change data is transmitted or received.
Also, Bank MSB/LSB is not transmitted or received.
CLP-950 CLP-930
MSB LSB
P.C.#
MSB LSB
P.C.#
GRAND PIANO 1* 0 112 0 0 112 0
GRAND PIANO 2 0 112 1
E.PIANO 1 0 112 5 0 112 5
E.PIANO 2 0 112 4 0 112 4
HARPSICHORD 0 112 6 0 112 6
VIBRAPHONE 0 112 11 0 112 11
CHURCH ORGAN 0 112 19 0 112 19
JAZZ ORGAN 0 112 16
STRINGS 0 112 48 0 112 48
CHOIR 0 112 52 0 112 52
WOOD BASS 0 112 32
E.BASS 0 112 33
* Indicated as GRAND PIANO on the CLP-930
P.C.#=Program Change number
7. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES
(Universal System Exclusive)
(1) Universal Realtime Message
Data format: [F0H] -> [7FH] -> [XnH] -> [04H] -> [01H] ->
[ll H] -> [mmH] -> [F7H]
MIDI Master Volume
Simultaneously changes the volume of all channels.
When a MIDI master volume message is received, the volume
only has affect on the MIDI receive channel, not the panel
master volume.
F0H = Exclusive status
7FH = Universal Realtime
7FH = ID of target device
04H = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
01H = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
ll H = Volume LSB
mmH = Volume MSB
F7H = End of Exclusive
or
F0H = Exclusive status
7FH = Universal Realtime
XnH = When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received.
X = dont care
04H = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
01H = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
ll H = Volume LSB
mmH = Volume MSB
F7H = End of Exclusive
CLP-950
CLP-930
(1) 1'st Voice OO
(2) Dual On/Off OO
(3) Dual Voice OO
(4) Dual Balance OO
(5) Dual Detune OO
(6) Dual Voice1 Octave OO
(7) Dual Voice2 Octave OO
(8) Dual Voice1 Effect Depth OO
(9) Dual Voice2 Effect Depth OO
(10) Split On/Off OX
(11) Split Voice OX
(12) Split Point OX
(13) Split Balance OX
(14) Split Voice1 Octave OX
(15) Split Voice2 Octave OX
(16) Split Voice1 Effect Depth OX
(17) Split Voice2 Effect Depth OX
(18) Split Dumper Mode OX
(19) Reverb Type 1 OO
(20) Reverb Type 2 OO
(21) Reverb Depth1 OO
(22) Reverb Depth2 OO
(23) Effect Type 1 OO
(24) Effect Type 2 OO
(25) Effect Depth OO
(26) Touch Sensitivity OO
(27) Fixed Data OO
(28) Left Pedal Function OO
(29) Absolute tempo low byte OO
(30) Absolute tempo high byte OO
X indicates no affect.
Panel data send requests cannot be received.
45
CLP-950/930
(2) Universal Non-Realtime Message (GM 0n)
General MIDI Mode On
Data format: [F0H] -> [7EH] -> [XnH] -> [09H] -> [01H] ->
[F7H]
F0H = Exclusive status
7EH = Universal Non-Realtime
7FH = ID of target device
09H = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
01H = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
F7H = End of Exclusive
or
F0H = Exclusive status
7EH = Universal Non-Realtime
XnH = When received, n=0~F.
X = dont care
09H = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
01H = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
F7H = End of Exclusive
When the General MIDI mode ON message is received, the MIDI
system will be reset to its default settings.
This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so suffi-
cient time should be allowed before the next message is sent.
8. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (XG Standard)
(1) XG Native Parameter Change
Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [4CH] -> [hhH] ->
[mmH] -> [ll H] -> [ddH] -> [F7H]
F0H = Exclusive status
43H = YAMAHA ID
1nH = When received, n=0~F.
When transmitted, n=0.
4CH = Model ID of XG
hhH = Address High
mmH = Address Mid
ll H = Address Low
ddH = Data
|
F7H = End of Exclusive
Data size must match parameter size.
When the XG System On message is received, the MIDI system
will be reset to its default settings.
The message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so suffi-
cient time should be allowed before the next message is sent.
(2) XG Native Bulk Data (reception only)
Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [4CH] -> [aaH] ->
[bbH] -> [hhH] -> [mmH] -> [llH] ->
[ddH] ->...-> [ccH] -> [F7H]
F0H Exclusive status
43H YAMAHA ID
0nH When received, n=0~F.
When transmitted, n=0.
4CH Model ID of XG
aaH ByteCount
bbH ByteCount
hhH Address High
mmH Address Mid
ll H Address Low
ddH Data
| |
| |
ccH Check sum
F7H End of Exclusive
Receipt of the XG SYSTEM ON message causes reinitialization
of relevant parameters and Control Change values. Allow suffi-
cient time for processing to execute (about 50 msec) before
sending the Clavinova another message.
XG Native Parameter Change message may contain two or four
bytes of parameter data (depending on the parameter size).
For information about the Address and Byte Count values, refer
to Table 1 below. Note that the tables Total Size value gives the
size of a bulk block. Only the top address of the block (00H, 00H,
00H) is valid as a bulk data address.
9. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES
(Clavinova MIDI Format)
Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [xxH] -> [nnH] ->
[F7H]
F0H = Exclusive status
43H = Yamaha ID
73H = Clavinova ID
xxH = Product ID (CLP-950/930 common ID: 67H or
CLP common ID: 01H)
nnH = Substatus
nn Control
02H Internal MIDI clock
03H External MIDI clock
06H Bulk Data (the bulk data follows 06H)
F7H = End of Exclusive
* When nn=02H or 03H, Clavinova common ID (01H) is
recognized as well as 50H.
BULK DUMP FORMAT
F0H, 43H, 73H
xxH =Product ID (CLP-950: 6BH,
CLP-930: 6AH)
06H =Bulk ID
05H =Sequence data
0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH =Data length
[BULK DATA] =
[CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-sum (BULK DATA)
F7H = End of Exclusive
10. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Special Control)
Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [xxH] -> [11H] ->
[0nH] -> [ccH] -> [vvH] -> [F7H]
F0H = Exclusive status
43H = Yamaha ID
73H = Clavinova ID
67H = CLP-950/930 common ID
11H = Clavinova special control
0nH = Control MIDI change (n=channel number)
cc = Control number
vv = Value
F7H = End of Exclusive
Control 0n ccH vvH
Split Point Always 00H 14H 14H :
Split Key Number
(CLP-950)
Metronome Always 00H 1BH 00H : off
01H :
02H : 2/4
03H : 3/4
04H : 4/4
05H : 5/4
06H : 6/4
7FH : No accent
Damper Level ch: 00H-0FH 3DH (Sets the Damper Level
for each channel:
CLP-950
)
00H-7FH
Channel Detune ch: 00H-0FH 43H (Sets the Detune value for
each channel)
00H-7FH
Voice Reserve ch: 00H-0FH 45H 00H : Reserve off
7FH : on*
* When Volume, Expression is received for Reserve On, they will
be effective from the next Key On. Reserve Off is normal.
11. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Others)
Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [27H] -> [30H] ->
[00H] -> [00H] -> [mmH] -> [ll H] -> [ccH] ->
[F7H]
Master Tuning (XG and last message priority) simultaneously
changes the pitch of all channels.
F0H = Exclusive Status
43H = Yamaha ID
1nH = Transmission from n=CLP is always 0. 0-F is received.
27H = Model ID of TG100
30H = Sub ID
00H =
00H =
mmH = Master Tune MSB
ll H = Master Tune LSB
ccH = dont care (under 7FH)
F7H = End of Exclusive
46
CLP-950/930
REVERB
MSB LSB
ROOM 02H 10H
HALL 1 01H 10H
HALL 2 01H 11H
STAGE 03H 10H
Sound board 03H 12H (CLP-950)
EFFECT
MSB LSB
CHORUS 42H 10H
PHASER 48H 10H
TREMOLO 42H 12H
DELAY 05H 10H
Effect MIDI Map
<Table 1>
MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM )
Address (H) Size (H) Data (H) Parameter Description Default value (H)
00 00 00 4
020C - 05F4(*1)
MASTER TUNE -50 - +50[cent] 00 04 00 00
01 1st bit 3 - 0 bit 15 - 12 400
02 2nd bit 3 - 0 bit 11 - 8
03 3rd bit 3 - 0 bit 7 - 4
4th bit 3 - 0 bit 3 - 0
04 1 00 - 7F MASTER VOLUME 0 - 127 7F
05 1 ——
06 1 34 - 4C(*2) TRANSPOSE -12 - +12[semitones] 40
7E 00 XG SYSTEM ON 00=XG sytem ON
7F 00 RESET ALL PARAMETERS 00=ON (receive only)
TOTAL SIZE 07
*1: Values lower than 020CH select -50 cents. Values higher than 05F4H select +50 cents.
*2: Values from 28H through 33H are interpreted as -12 through -1. Values from 4DH through 58H are interpreted as +1 through +12.
<Table 2>
MIDI Parameter Change table ( EFFECT 1)
Refer to the Effect MIDI Map for a complete list of Reverb, Chorus and Variation type numbers.
Address (H) Size (H) Data (H) Parameter Description Default value (H)
02 01 00 2 00-7F REVERB TYPE MSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 01(=HALL1)
00-7F REVERB TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00
02 01 40 2 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 00(=Effect off)
00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00
VARIATION refers to the EFFECT on the panel.
<Table 3>
MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI PART )
Address (H) Size (H) Data (H) Parameter Description Default value (H)
08 nn 11 1 00 - 7F DRY LEVEL 0 - 127 7F
nn = Part Number
MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format des données MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI
47
CLP-950/930
YAMAHA [Clavinova] Date: 1 March, 2000
Model: CLP-950/930 MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.0
Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic Default 1 1
Channel Changed 1~16 1~16
Default 3 1 *1 Poly Mode only
Mode Messages XX
Altered ***************** X
Note 9~120 0~127
Number : True voice ***************** 21~108
Velocity Note on O 9nH, v=1~127 O v=1~127
Note off X 9nH, v=0 X
After keys XX
Touch Chs XX
Pitch Bender XX
Control Change
0, 32 OOBank Select
07 XOVolume
11 OOExpression
64 OODamper
66 OOSostenuto
67 OOSoft pedal
91 OOReverb Depth
94 OOEffect Depth
120 XOAll sounds off
121 XOReset All Controllers
Program OO
Change : True # *****************
System Exclusive OO
System : Song Position XX
: Song Select XX
Common : Tune XX
System : Clock OO
Real Time : Commands OO
Aux : Local ON/OFF XO
: All Notes Off OO (123~127)
Messages : Active Sense OO
: Reset XX
Notes : *1 = Recieve Mode is always multi timbre and Poly mode.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO O: Yes
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO X: No
48
CLP-950/930
CAUTION
Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the
correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence
given below.
Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated above. Use of
incorrect screws can cause damage.
Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each
unit.
To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will
be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the
parts as needed.
Z
Attach the side panels (B) to the pedal box
(C).
Align the holes on the side of the pedal box (C) with those on
the side panels (B), attach the pedal box to the side panels using
the four 6 x 25 millimeter round-head screws 1 — two screws
on each side. Make sure the pedals extend in the same direction
as the feet.
X
Attach the front panel (D).
The front panel attaches to the front end of the pedal box and
side panels. Fit the front panel into position. Align the small hole
in each six brackets and attach the front panel using the six 4 x 12
millimeter round-head screws 2.
VORSICHT
Achten Sie darauf, die Teile nicht zu verwechseln, und installieren Sie alle Teile in
der richtigen Ausrichtung. Gehen Sie beim Zusammenbau bitte in der angegebe-
nen Reihenfolge vor.
Die Montage sollte von mindestens zwei Personen vorgenommen werden.
Achten Sie darauf, die richtige Schraubengröße zu verwenden, wie es oben
gezeigt ist. Die Verwendung der falschen Schrauben kann zu Schäden führen.
Achten Sie während der Montage darauf, bei jedem Arbeitsgang alle Schrauben
festzuziehen.
Für die Demontage muß die angegebene Reihenfolge umgekehrt befolgt werden.
Sie benötigen einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher (+).
Es werden die in der “Bauteile”-Zeichnung abgebildeten
Teile verwendet. Folgen Sie beim Zusammenbau den
Anweisungen, und wählen Sie die jeweils benötigten Teile.
Z
Befestigen Sie die Seitenwände (B) am Pedal-
kasten (C).
Bringen Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Seite des Pedal-
kastens (C) mit denen an den Seitenwänden (B) zur Deckung, und
schrauben Sie den Pedalkasten mit den vier 6 x 25 mm Halbrund-
schrauben 1, jeweils zwei Schrauben links und rechts, an den
Seitenwänden fest. Achten Sie dabei darauf, daß die Pedale in diesel-
be Richtung weisen wie die vorspringenden Teile der Füße.
X
Montieren Sie die Stirnwand (D).
Die Stirnwand wird am vorderen Ende des Pedalkastens und der
Seitenwände angebracht. Setzen Sie die Stirnwand an. Bringen Sie
die
kleinen Bohrungen der sechs Halterungen mit denen in der Stirn-
wand aus, und schrauben Sie die Stirnwand mit den sechs 4 x 12 mm
Halbrundschrauben 2 fest.
CLP-950: Zusammenbau und Aufstellung
CLP-950: Keyboard Stand Assembly
6 x 25 mm round-head screws
6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben
Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm
Tornillos de cabeza redonda
de 6 x 25 mm
4 x 12 mm round-head screws
4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben
Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm
Tornillos de cabeza redonda
de 4 x 12 mm
6 x 16 mm flat-head screws
6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben
Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm
Tornillos de cabeza plana de
6 x 16 mm
4 x 20 mm tapping screws
4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben
Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm
Tornillos de autoenrosque de
4 x 20 mm
Pedal cord
Pedalkabel
Cordon de pédalier
Cable de pedales
E
A
B
C
D
x 4 1
x 8 2
x 4 3
x 4 4
Cord holders x 2
Kabelhalter x 2
Serre-câble x 2
Soportes de cable x 2
AC power cord
Netzkabel
Cordon d’alimentation
Cable de alimentación de CA
B
Assembly Parts / Bauteile / Éléments à assembler / Partes del conjunto
The music stand is packaged in cardboard, and included
inside the box. Do not forget to remove it from the box.
Der Notenständer ist in einer separaten Verpackung im
Karton enthalten. Vergessen Sie beim Auspacken nicht,
auch den Notenständer aus dem Karton zu nehmen.
Le pupitre à partition est emballé dans du carton et se
trouve dans la boîte. Ne pas oublier de le retirer la boîte.
El atril está embalado con cartón y se encuentra dentro de
la caja. No se olvide de sacarlo de la caja.
49
CLP-950/930
1
CLP-950: Assemblage du support de clavier
PRECAUTION
Veiller à ne pas mélanger les pièces et à les installer dans le sens
correct. Veuillez assembler l’instrument dans l’ordre indiqué ci-dessous.
La présence de deux personnes minimum est nécessaire pour procéder
au montage.
Toujours utiliser des vis aux dimensions correctes, comme indiqué
cidessus. I’utilisation de vis aux dimensions incorrectes pourrait en effet
endommager l’instrument.
Resserrer convenablement toutes les vis après le montage de chaque
élément.
Pour démonter le Clavinova, inverser l’ordre des indications données ci-
dessous.
Munissez-vous d’un tournevis Phillips (cruciforme).
Les éléments qui sont représentés sur la figure intitulée
“Éléments à assembler” seront utilisés. Veuillez vous con-
former aux instructions d’assemblage et sélectionner les
éléments nécessaires.
Z
Fixez les panneaux latéraux (B) au pédalier (C)
Faites correspondre les trous visibles sur le flanc du pédalier (C)
avec deux des panneaux latéraux (B), puis fixer le pédalier sur les
panneaux latéraux à l’aide de quatre vis de fixation à tête ronde de 6
x 25 millimètres 1 - soit deux vis de chaque côté. Veillez à ce que
les pédales soient dirigées dans le même sens que les supports infé-
rieurs.
X
Fixez le panneau avant (D).
Le panneau avant se fixe sur le bord avant du logement de
pédalier et sur les panneaux latéraux. Montez le panneau avant dans
la position voulue. Alignez les trous de
faible diamètre percés dans
chacune des platines de fixation puis fixer le panneau avant en
utilisant les six vis de fixation à tete ronde de 4 x 12 millimètres 2.
CLP-950: Conjunto del soporte del teclado
CUIDADO
Observe cuidado para no confundir las piezas, y asegúrese de montar
todas ellas en el sentido correcto. Proceda al montaje en el orden
indicado a continuación.
El montaje deberá realizarse al menos por dos personas.
Procure utilizar los tornillos del tamaño adecuado, según se indica
arriba. El empleo de tornillos inadecuados puede ocasionar daños en
el instrumento.
Asegúrese de apretar bien todos los tornillos después de montar cada
unidad.
Para desmontar las unidades, invierta la secuencia de montaje facilita-
da a continuación.
Tenga preparado un destornillador de cabeza en cruz (+).
Se usarán las partes mostradas en la ilustración de
“Partes del conjunto”. Siga las instrucciones de montaje y
seleccione las partes a medida que se requieran.
Z
Acople los paneles laterales (B) en la caja de
pedales (C).
Alinee los orificios del lado de la caja de pedales (C) con los de
los paneles laterales (B), y acople la caja de pedales a los paneles
laterales empleando los cuatro tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x
25 milímetros 1 — dos tornillos en cada lado. Asegúrese de que
el pedal se extiende en la misma dirección que la pata.
X
Monte el panel frontal (D).
El panel frontal se coloca en el extremo frontal de la caja de
pedales y los paneles laterales. Adapte el panel frontal en su posi-
ción. Alinee el orificio
pequeño de cada una de las seis ménsulas y
monte el panel frontal empleando los seis tornillos de cabeza re-
donda de 4 x 12 milímetros 2.
B
B
C
6 x 25 mm round-head screws 1
6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben 1
Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm 1
Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm 1
Remove the vinyl tie from the folded pedal cord. Do
not remove the vinyl tie located next to the hole.
Entfernen Sie den Kabelbinder vom
zusammengelegten Pedalkabel. Der Kabelbinder
neben der Durchführung darf nicht entfernt werden!
Retirez l’attache en vinyle du cordon de pédale plié.
Ne retirez pas l’attache en vinyle placée près de
l’ouverture.
Extraiga la abrazadera de plástico del cable del pedal
plegado. No extraiga la abrazadera de plástico que
está al lado del orificio.
R
L
2
D
4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2
4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2
Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm 2
Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2
B
B
50
CLP-950/930
6 x 16 mm flat-head screws 3
6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben 3
Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm 3
Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 mm 3
A
3
C
Montieren Sie die Tastatureinheit (A).
Setzen Sie die Tastatureinheit (A) so auf den fertigen Ständer,
daß die beiden Schrauben an ihrer Unterseite hinter den Winkel-
blechen mit Führungsschlitz an der Hinterseite des Ständers zu
liegen kommen. Schieben Sie die Tastatureinheit dann bis zum
Anschlag in die Schlitze. KLEMMEN SIE IHRE FINGER
DABEI NICHT EIN!!
Richten Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Unterseite der
Tastatureinheit mit den Bohrungen der Winkelbleche aus
(achten
Sie auch darauf, daß sie mittig auf dem Ständer steht, wie in der
Abbildung gezeigt), um die Tastatureinheit dann mit den vier 6 x
16 mm Senkschrauben 3 festzuschrauben. Die vier Schrauben
können von der Rückseite her eingeführt werden.
VORSICHT
Halten Sie die Tastatureinheit nur wie in der obigen Abbildung!
Achten Sie darauf, daß Sie Ihre Finger nicht zwischen Tastatur-
einheit und den Seitenwänden bzw. der Rückwand einklemmen —
die Tastatureinheit könnte dadurch zu Fall kommen!
V
Schließen Sie das Lautsprecherkabel an.
Das vom Lautsprecher kommende Kabel wird an die entspre-
chende Buchse an der Tastatrureinheit angeschlossen. Der Kabel-
stecker paßt nur in einer Ausrichtung in die Buchse (mit der
Führungsnase zur Rückseite des Instruments weisend, wie in der
Abbildung verdeutlicht). Versuchen Sie nicht, den Stecker falsch
herum mit Gewalt in die Buchse zu drücken!
B
Schließen Sie das Pedalkabel an.
Das vom Pedalkasten kommende Pedalkabel wird an die PE-
DAL-Buchse hinten an der Unterseite der Tastatureinheit ange-
schlossen. Bringen Sie nach dem Anschluß die Kabelhalter an der
Seitenwand an, um das Kabel dann in diese Halter zu klemmen.
C
Install the main unit (A).
Place the main unit (A) on the side panels (B) with the screws
on its bottom panel (toward the rear of the main unit) just behind
the grooves in the brackets located at the top of the side panels.
Then slide the main unit forward until it stops. WATCH YOUR
FINGERS WHEN DOING THIS!!
Align the holes on the bottom panel of the main unit with the
holes in the brackets on the side panels
(also center the main unit
to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides, as shown in
the illustration), then use the four 6 x 16 millimeter flat-head
screws 3 to attach the main unit. The four screws can be at-
tached from the rear.
CAUTION
Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position
shown in the above illustration.
Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or
side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit.
V
Connect the speaker cord.
The speaker cord from the speaker box must be plugged into
the corresponding connector in the main unit. The plug only goes
in one way (the lug on the connector should face the rear of the
main unit, as shown in the illustration), so don’t try to force it in
the wrong way around.
B
Connect the pedal cord.
The pedal cord from the pedal box must be plugged into the
PEDAL connector located at the rear of the main unit’s under-
side. Once connected, attach the cord holders to the side panel as
shown, then clip the cord into the holders.
10 cm
Be sure to place your hands at least 10 centimeters from
either end of the main unit when positioning it.
Mindestens 10 cm innen unter die Tastatureinheit greifen.
Placez bien vos mains à 10 cm au moins des extrémités
du clavier, lors de sa mise en place.
Asegúrese de colocar las manos por lo menos a 10
centímetros desde los extremos de la unidad principal
cuando la sitúe.
10 cm
The bracket on the front has 2 holes. Insert the screws into
the holes on the front panel side of the bracket.
Die vorderen Winkelbleche haben zwei
Schraubenbohrungen. Führen Sie die Schraube jeweils in
die Bohrung an der Stirnwandseite ein.
La partie avant de la ferrure comporte deux trous.
Introduisez les vis de fixation dans les trois du côté du
panneau avant de la ferrure.
La ménsula de la parte frontal tiene 2 orificios. Inserte los
tornillos en los orificios del lado del panel frontal de la
ménsula.
51
CLP-950/930
C
Installez le clavier (A)
Placez le clavier sur les panneaux latéraux (B), avec les vis de
son panneau inférieur (situées vers l’arrière du clavier) placées
immédiatement derrière les rainures des ferrures situées à la
partie supérieure des panneaux latéraux (B), puis faites glisser le
clavier vers l’avant jusqu’à ce qu’il vienne en butée. FAITES
ATTENTION A VOS DOIGTS EN EXECUTANT CETTE
OPERATION!!
Alignez les trous du panneau inférieur du clavier sur les trous
des ferrures des panneaux latéraux
(centrez également le clavier
de manière à avoir un jeu identique de chaque côté) utilisez en-
suite quatre vis de fixation à tête plate de 6 x 16 millimètres 3
pour immobiliser le clavier. Les quatre vis peuvent être fixées par
l’arrière.
PRECAUTION
Ne tenez pas le clavier d’une autre manière que celle indiquée sur
l’illustration ci-dessus.
Attention car vous risquez de vous faire pincer les doigts entre le
clavier et les panneaux arrière ou latéraux de sorte que vous devez
veiller à ne pas faire tomber le clavier.
V
Raccordez le câble de haut-parleur
Le câble de haut-parleur qui sort du logement de haut-parleur
doit être raccordé au connecteur correspondant du clavier. La
prise ne s’enclenche que d’une seule manière (la cosse du con-
necteur doit être orientée vers l’arrière du clavier, comme indiqué
sur l’illustration), aussi, n’essayez pas de la faire entrer de force
dans le mauvais sens.
B
Raccordez le câble du pédalier
Le câble du pédalier qui sort du logement de pédalier doit être
raccordé au connecteur PEDAL implanté à l’arrière du panneau
de dessus de l’instrument. Une fois branché, fixez les attaches de
câble sur le panneau latéral en procédant de la façon représentée
sur la figure, puis emboîtez le câble dans les attaches.
C
Instale la unidad principal (A).
Coloque la unidad principal en los paneles laterales (B) con
los tornillos de su panel inferior (hacia la parte posterior de la
unidad principal) justo detrás de las ranuras de la ménsula ubica-
da en la parte superior de los paneles laterales (B), después desli-
ce el teclado hacia adelante hasta que se pare. ¡TENGA CUIDA-
DO CON SUS DEDOS MIENTRAS LO HACE!
Alinee los orificios del panel inferior de la unidad principal
con los orificios de las ménsulas de los paneles laterales
(también
centre la unidad principal para producir una holgura igual en los
lados derecho e izquierdo, como se muestra en la ilustración), y
emplee entonces los cuatro tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16
milímetros 3 para montar la unidad principal. Los cuatro torni-
llos pueden colocarse desde detrás.
CUIDADO
No sostenga el teclado en ninguna posición que no sea la posición
mostrada en la ilustración de arriba.
Podría pillarse los dedos ente la unidad principal y los paneles trase-
ros o laterales, por lo que deberá tener mucho cuidado que no se
caiga la unidad principal.
V
Conecte el cable de altavoz.
El cable de altavoz procedente de la caja de altavoces debe
enchufarse al conector correspondiente de la unidad principal. La
clavija sólo entra en un sentido (la lengüeta del conector debe
orientarse hacia atrás de la unidad principal, como se muestra en
la ilustración), por lo que no deberá forzarla al revés. Una vez
conectada, coloque los soportes de cable en el panel trasero como
se muestra, y enganche el cable en los soportes.
B
Conecte el cable de los pedales.
El cable de los pedales procedente de la caja de pedales debe
enchufarse al conector PEDAL situado en la parte posterior del lado
inferior de la unidad principal. Una vez se ha conectado, coloque los
soportes de cable del panel lateral como se muestra, y sujete el cable en
los soportes.
4
Before connecting the speaker cord, remove the vinyl tie
attaching the speaker cord to the front panel.
Entfernen Sie vor dem Anschluß des Lautsprecherkabels
den Kabelbinder, mit dem das Kabel an der Stirnwand
festgemacht ist.
Avant de raccorder le cordon de haut-parleur, retirez
l’attache en vinyle qui immobilise le cordon de haut-parleur
sur le panneau avant.
Antes de conectar el cable de altavoz, extraiga la
abrazadera de plástico que fija el cable de altavoz al panel
frontal.
5
Cord holder
Kabelhalter
Serre-câble
Soporte del
cable
P
E
D
A
L
P
E
D
AL
52
CLP-950/930
6
A voltage selector is provided in some areas.
Spannungswähler
(nur in bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten)
Un sélecteur de tension est prévu pour
certaines régions
El selector de tensión está provisto para
ciertos destinos.
240
127
110
220
7
B
E
4 x 20 mm tapping screws 4
4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 4
Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 4
Tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 4
4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2
4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2
Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm 2
Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2
N
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the
voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selec-
tor for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus”
screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for
your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.
After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC
power cord to the AC INLET.
CAUTION
An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the
Clavinova or result in improper operation.
M
Attach the rear panel (E).
With the rear panel slightly angled as shown in the illustration,
lower it onto the feet’s protruding edge at the rear of the pedal
box. At this time, run the AC power cord through the cutout on the
rear panel. Then, secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel
brackets using two 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2. Finally,
secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four 4 x
20 mm tapping screws 4.
Move the instrument to the location where it will be used and
connect the AC power cord to an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor
may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration
of the AC wall outlets in your area
After completing the assembly, please check
the following.
Are there any parts left over?
Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors.
Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures?
Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.
Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it?
Tighten all screws.
Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets?
Check the connection.
If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on
the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all
screws.
N
Den Spannungswähler einstellen.
Bevor Sie nun das Netzkabel anschließen, müssen Sie den Spannungs-
wähler (falls vorhanden) auf die örtliche Netzspannung einstellen. Zum
Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungswähler mit einem Schlitz-
schraubendreher, bis der richtige Spannungswert (110, 127, 220 oder
240) an der Pfeilmarkierung steht. Bei der Auslieferung werden alle
Instrumente mit Spannungswähler auf “240” voreingestellt.
Nachdem Sie den Spannungswähler auf den richtigen Spannungswert
eingestellt haben, stecken Sie das Netzkabel in die AC INLET-Buchse.
VORSICHT
Eine falsche Spannungseinstellung kann das Clavinova schwer beschädi-
gen und Funktionsstörungen zur Folge haben.
M
Montieren Sie die Rückwand (E).
Setzen Sie die Rückwand leicht abgewinkelt, wie in der Abbildung
gezeigt, hinter dem Pedalkasten auf die hervorspringenden Teile der
Füße auf. Verlegen Sie das Netzkabel dabei durch den Ausschnitt in
der Rückwand. Schrauben Sie dann die Rückwand oben mit zwei 4 x
12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 fest. Schrauben Sie die Rückwand
abschließend noch mit vier 4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 4 an den
Pedalkasten.
Bringen Sie das Instrument an seinen Stellplatz, und schließen Sie
das Netzkabel an eine Steckdose an. In manchen Gebieten wird ein
Steckerdapter mitgeliefert, um den Anschluß an die evtl. unterschied-
lich geformte Steckdose zu ermöglichen.
Wenn der Zusammenbau beendet ist, prüfen
Sie bitte folgende Dinge:
Sind Teile übrig geblieben?
Gehen Sie den Vorgang des Zusammenbaus noch einmal durch und
korrigieren Sie eventuelle Fehler.
Befindet sich das Clavinova weit genug von Türen und anderen bewegli-
chen Vorrichtungen entfernt?
Bewegen Sie das Clavinova an einen entsprechend sicheren Ort.
Macht das Clavinova Klappergeräusche, wenn Sie es schütteln?
Ziehen Sie alle Schrauben fest.
Sind Pedal-und Netzkabel richtig an den Buchsen angeschlossen?
Prüfen Sie die Verbindung.
Wenn die Haupteinheit knarrt oder beim Spielen wackelt, betrachten Sie
die Abbildungen und ziehen Sie alle Schrauben noch einmal nach.
Nach dem Zusammenbau müssen Sie den Tastatur-Sicherungsdraht
entfernen. Diese Arbeit wird nur einmal ausgeführt, und der Draht
braucht später nicht wieder angebracht zu werden. Anweisungen hierzu
entnehmen Sie bitte dem unter der Tastaturabdeckung auf den Tasten
liegenden Hinweisblatt (siehe Seite 10).
After assembly is complete, it will be necessary to remove the keyboard
string. This procedure is performed once only and the string will never
have to be reattached again. For instructions on its removal, refer to the
paper titled "REQUEST" that can be found on the keys underneath the
key cover (see page 10).
53
CLP-950/930
N
Sélecteur de tension
Avant de connecter le cordon d’alimentation, vérifiez le réglage
du sélecteur de tension qui est prévu pour certaines régions. Pour
régler le sélecteur sur 110 V, 127 V, 220 V ou 240 V, utilisez un
tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le cadran du sélecteur afin de
mettre l’indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à
vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Le sélecteur de ten-
sion est réglé sur 240 V au départ d’usine.
Après avoir choisi la tension appropriée, branchez le cordon d’ali-
mentation secteur dans la prise AC INLET de l’instrument.
PRECAUTION
Vous risquez de sérieusement endommager le Clavinova ou de provo-
quer un fonctionnement anormal de linstrument en ne choisissant pas
correctement la tension dalimentation.
M
Fixez le panneau arrière (E)
En inclinant légèrement en angle le panneau arrière, comme men-
tionné sur l’illustration, abaissez-le sur le rebord des pieds, à l’arrière du
pédalier. Faire passer à ce moment-là le cordon d’alimentation secteur
dans l’échancrure aménagée dans le panneau arrière. Puis fixez le haut
du panneau arrière sur les supports des panneaux latéraux à l’aide de
deux vis à tête ronde 4 x 12 mm 2. Et finalement, fixez le bas du pan-
neau arrière au pédalier avec quatre vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 4.
Déplacez l’instrument jusqu’à l’emplacement où il est prévue de l’uti-
liser, puis raccorder le cordon d’alimentation secteur à une prise de sortie
secteur. Un adaptateur de prise peut également être fourni dans certaines
régions pour pouvoir brancher le cordon à la prise secteur murale.
Lorsque le montage est terminé, veuillez me-
ner à bien les vérifications suivantes.
Reste-t-il des pièces non utilisées?
Passer en revue la procédure de montage et corriger toute erreur éventuelle.
Le Clavinova est-il placé à l’écart des portes et de toute autre structure mobile?
Déplacer le Clavinova vers un emplacement approprié.
Lorsque vous secouez quelque peu le Clavinova, entendez-vous un cliquetis?
Serrer convenablement toutes les vis.
Les cordons des pédales et dalimentation sont-ils bien enfoncés dans les prises?
Vérifier toutes les connexions.
Si la partie principale de lappareil craque ou est instable lorsque vous jouez sur le
clavier, consulter les diagrammes de montage et resserrer toutes les vis.
N
Selector de tensión
Antes de conectar el cable de alimentación de CA, compruebe el
ajuste del selector de tensión que se incorpora para ciertos destinos.
Para ajustar el selector a 110V, 127V, 220V ó 240V de la red de
alimentación, emplee un destornillador de cabeza recta “-” para girar
el selector de modo que la tensión correcta de su zona aparezca al
lado del indicador del panel. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V
cuando la unidad sale de fábrica.
Después de haber seleccionado la tensión correcta, enchufe el
cable de alimentación de CA a la toma AC INLET.
CUIDADO
Un ajuste incorrecto de la tensión puede causar daños serios a la
Clavinova o ser motivo de mal funcionamiento.
M
Monte el panel trasero (E).
Con el panel trasero un poco inclinado en ángulo como se muestra en
la ilustración, bájelo al borde saliente de las patas de la parte posterior de
la caja de pedales. Entonces, pase el cable de alimentación de CA por el
corte del panel posterior. Entonces, fije la parte superior del panel trasero
a las ménsulas de panel lateral usando dos tornillos de cabeza redonda de
4 x 12 mm 2. Finalmente, fije la parte inferior del panel trasero a la caja
de pedales usando cuatro tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 4.
Mueva el instrumento al lugar donde deba utilizarse y conecte el cable
de alimentación de CA a una toma de corriente de CA de la pared. En
algunas zonas puede suministrarse también un adaptador para adaptar la
configuración de las patillas de los tomacorrientes de CA de su localidad.
Cuando haya concluido el montaje, comprue-
be los siguientes puntos:
•¿Ha quedado alguna pieza sin instalar?
Revise el procedimiento de montaje y corrija cualquier error que se haya
podido cometer.
•¿Está el Clavinova alejado del recorrido de puertas y muebles?
Traslade el Clavinova a una posición adecuada.
•¿Suena algún ruido de holgura cuando se mueve el Clavinova?
Apriete con firmeza todos los tornillos.
•¿Están perfectamente insertados los cables de pedal y alimentación en los
conectores?
Revise las conexiones.
Si la unidad principal cruje o presenta algún signo de inestabilidad cuando se
toca el teclado, consulte los esquemas de montajee y vuelva a apretar todos
los tornillos.
CAUTION
When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold in-
strument by the lower surface in the front of the main unit and
by the handles in the rear panel. NEVER the top portion or
keyboard cover. Improper handling can result in damage to the
instrument or personal injury.
VORSICHT
Fassen Sie zum Umstellen des Instruments nach dem Zusam-
menbau vorne unter die Unterseite der Tastatureinheit und
hinten in die Griffmulden; heben Sie es NIEMALS am oberen
Teil des Gehäuses oder am Tastaturdeckel. Bei Nicht-
beachtung dieses Punkts kann das Instrument beschädigt und
im Extremfall eine Verletzung hervorgerufen werden.
PRECAUTION
Lorsque linstrument doit être déplacé après avoir été assemblé,
saisissez-le toujours par la surface inférieure de linstrument pro-
prement dit et par les poignées du panneau arrière. JAMAIS par sa
partie supérieure ou par le protège-clavier. Une mauvaise manipu-
lation peut provoquer des dommages ou des blessures.
CUIDADO
Cuando mueva el instrumento después del montaje, sostenga
siempre el instrumento por la superficie inferior de delante de la
unidad principal y por las asas del panel posterior. NUNCA la
parte superior de la cubierta del teclado. La manipulación
indebida puede causar daños en el instrumento o personales.
Dès que lassemblage est complètement terminé, la corde de clavier
doit être retirée. Ceci nest exécuté quune seule fois et il ne sera plus
nécessaire de fixer la corde à nouveau. En ce qui concerne les instruc-
tions pour retirer cette corde, veuillez vous référer à la page intitulée
REQUEST qui est placée sur les touches du clavier sous le couvre-
clavier (voir page 10).
Después de haber terminado el montaje, será necesario extraer la
cuerda del teclado. Este procedimiento sólo se lleva a cabo una vez y
la cuerda no se tendrá que volver a atar nunca más. Para las instruc-
ciones sobre la extracción de la cuerda, consulte el documento titulado
RUEGO que encontrará sobre las teclas debajo de la cubierta del
teclado (vea la página 10).
54
CLP-950/930
CAUTION
Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the
correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence
given below.
Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated above. Use of
incorrect screws can cause damage.
Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each
unit.
To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will
be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the
parts as needed.
Z
Attach the side panels (D) to the pedal box
(C).
Before installing the pedal box, untie and straighten out the
bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Don’t dis-
card the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step V.
Align the holes on the side of the pedal box (C) with those on
the side panels (D), attach the pedal box to the side panels using
the four 6 x 25 millimeter round-head screws 1 — two screws
on each side. Make sure the pedals extend in the same direction
as the feet.
VORSICHT
Achten Sie darauf, die Teile nicht zu verwechseln, und installieren Sie alle Teile in
der richtigen Ausrichtung. Gehen Sie beim Zusammenbau bitte in der angegebenen
Reihenfolge vor.
Die Montage sollte von mindestens zwei Personen vorgenommen werden.
Achten Sie darauf, die richtige Schraubengröße zu verwenden, wie es oben gezeigt
ist. Die Verwendung der falschen Schrauben kann zu Schäden führen.
Achten Sie während der Montage darauf, bei jedem Arbeitsgang alle Schrauben
festzuziehen.
Für die Demontage muß die angegebene Reihenfolge umgekehrt befolgt werden.
Sie benötigen einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher (+).
Es werden die in der “Bauteile”-Zeichnung abgebildeten
Teile verwendet. Folgen Sie beim Zusammenbau den
Anweisungen, und wählen Sie die jeweils benötigten Teile.
Z
Befestigen Sie die Seitenwände (D) am Pedal-
kasten (C).
Bevor Sie den Pedalkasten montieren, nehmen Sie zunächst das
gebündelte Kabel aus dem Pedalkasten, entfernen den Kabelbinder und
ziehen das Kabel dann gerade aus. Werfen Sie den Kabelbinder nicht
wg, er wird in Schritt V wieder gebraucht.
Bringen Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Seite des Pedalkastens
(C) mit denen an den Seitenwänden (D) zur Deckung, und schrauben
Sie den Pedalkasten mit den vier 6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben 1,
jeweils zwei Schrauben links und rechts, an den Seitenwänden fest.
Achten Sie dabei darauf, daß die Pedale in dieselbe Richtung weisen
wie die vorspringenden Teile der Füße.
CLP-930: Zusammenbau und Aufstellung
CLP-930: Keyboard Stand Assembly
6 x 25 mm round-head screws
6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben
Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm
Tornillos de cabeza redonda
de 6 x 25 mm
4 x 12 mm round-head screws
4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben
Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm
Tornillos de cabeza redonda
de 4 x 12 mm
4 x 20 mm tapping screws
4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben
Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm
Tornillos de autoenrosque de
4 x 20 mm
6 x 16 mm flat-head screws
6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben
Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm
Tornillos de cabeza plana de
6 x 16 mm
Bundled pedal cord inside
Gebündeltes Pedalkabel
Cordon de pédalier enroulé à l’intérieur
Cable de pedales enrollado en el interior
D
D
A
B
C
x 4 1
x 2 2
x 4 3
x 4 4
Cord holders x 2
Kabelhalter x 2
Serre-câble x 2
Soportes de cable x 2
AC power cord
Netzkabel
Cordon d’alimentation
Cable de alimentación de CA
Assembly Parts / Bauteile / Éléments à assembler / Partes del conjunto
The music stand is packaged in cardboard, and included
inside the box. Do not forget to remove it from the box.
Der Notenständer ist in einer separaten Verpackung im
Karton enthalten. Vergessen Sie beim Auspacken nicht,
auch den Notenständer aus dem Karton zu nehmen.
Le pupitre à partition est emballé dans du carton et se
trouve dans la boîte. Ne pas oublier de le retirer la boîte.
El atril está embalado con cartón y se encuentra dentro de
la caja. No se olvide de sacarlo de la caja.
55
CLP-950/930
1
CLP-930: Assemblage du support de clavier
PRECAUTION
Veiller à ne pas mélanger les pièces et à les installer dans le sens correct. Veuillez
assembler l’instrument dans l’ordre indiqué ci-dessous.
La présence de deux personnes minimum est nécessaire pour procéder au montage.
Toujours utiliser des vis aux dimensions correctes, comme indiqué cidessus. I’utilisation
de vis aux dimensions incorrectes pourrait en effet endommager l’instrument.
Resserrer convenablement toutes les vis après le montage de chaque élément.
Pour démonter le Clavinova, inverser l’ordre des indications données ci-dessous.
Munissez-vous d’un tournevis Phillips (cruciforme).
Les éléments qui sont représentés sur la figure intitulée
“Éléments à assembler” seront utilisés. Veuillez vous con-
former aux instructions d’assemblage et sélectionner les
éléments nécessaires.
Z
Fixez les panneaux latéraux (D) au pédalier
(C)
Avant de poser le pédalier, détacher le cordon de la partie infé-
rieure du pédalier et le dérouler. Ne jetez pas l’attache en vinyle,
vous la réutiliserez ultérieurement à l’étape V.
Faites correspondre les trous visibles sur le flanc du pédalier (C)
avec deux des panneaux latéraux (D), puis fixer le pédalier sur les
panneaux latéraux à l’aide de quatre vis de fixation à tête ronde de
6 x 25 millimètres 1 - soit deux vis de chaque côté. Veillez à ce
que les pédales soient dirigées dans le même sens que les supports
inférieurs.
CLP-930: Conjunto del soporte del teclado
CUIDADO
Observe cuidado para no confundir las piezas, y asegúrese de montar todas ellas
en el sentido correcto. Proceda al montaje en el orden indicado a continuación.
El montaje deberá realizarse al menos por dos personas.
Procure utilizar los tornillos del tamaño adecuado, según se indica arriba. El
empleo de tornillos inadecuados puede ocasionar daños en el instrumento.
Asegúrese de apretar bien todos los tornillos después de montar cada unidad.
Para desmontar las unidades, invierta la secuencia de montaje facilitada a
continuación.
Tenga preparado un destornillador de cabeza en cruz (+).
Se usarán las partes mostradas en la ilustración de
“Partes del conjunto”. Siga las instrucciones de montaje y
seleccione las partes a medida que se requieran.
Z
Acople los paneles laterales (D) en la caja de
pedales (C).
Antes de instalar la caja de pedales, desate y enderezca el cable
plegado unido a la parte inferior de la caja de pedales. No tire la
abrazadera de vinilo, porque la necesitará en el paso V de más
adelante.
Alinee los orificios del lado de la caja de pedales (C) con los de
los paneles laterales (D), y acople la caja de pedales a los paneles
laterales empleando los cuatro tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25
milímetros 1 — dos tornillos en cada lado. Asegúrese de que el
pedal se extiende en la misma dirección que la pata.
D
D
C
6 x 25 mm round-head screws 1
6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben 1
Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm 1
Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm 1
56
CLP-950/930
2
X
Montieren Sie die Rückwand (B).
Setzen Sie die Rückwand leicht abgewinkelt, wie in der Abbil-
dung gezeigt, hinter dem Pedalkasten auf die hervorspringenden
Teile der Füße auf. Schrauben Sie dann die Rückwand oben mit
zwei 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 so an den Seitenwänden
fest, daß kein Spiel zwischen Rückwand und Seitenwänden ver-
bleibt. Schrauben Sie die Rückwand abschließend noch mit vier 4
x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 3 an den Pedalkasten.
C
Montieren Sie die Tastatureinheit (A).
Setzen Sie die Tastatureinheit (A) so auf den fertigen Ständer,
daß die beiden Schrauben an ihrer Unterseite hinter den Winkel-
blechen mit Führungsschlitz an der Hinterseite des Ständers zu
liegen kommen. Schieben Sie die Tastatureinheit dann bis zum
Anschlag in die Schlitze. KLEMMEN SIE IHRE FINGER
DABEI NICHT EIN!!
Richten Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Unterseite der
Tastatureinheit mit den Bohrungen der Winkelbleche aus
(achten
Sie auch darauf, daß sie mittig auf dem Ständer steht, wie in der
Abbildung gezeigt), um die Tastatureinheit dann mit den vier 6 x
16 mm Senkschrauben 4 festzuschrauben. Die vier Schrauben
können von der Vorderseite her eingedreht werden.
VORSICHT
Halten Sie die Tastatureinheit nur wie in der obigen Abbildung!
Achten Sie darauf, daß Sie Ihre Finger nicht zwischen Tastatur-
einheit und den Seitenwänden bzw. der Rückwand einklemmen —
die Tastatureinheit könnte dadurch zu Fall kommen!
X
Attach the rear panel (B).
With the rear panel slightly angled as shown in the illustration,
lower it onto the feet’s protruding edge at the rear of the pedal
box. Then, while eliminating any gaps between the rear and side
panels, secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets
using two 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2. Finally, secure the
bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four 4 x 20 mm
tapping screws 3.
C
Install the main unit (A).
Place the main unit (A) on the side panels (D) with the screws
on its bottom panel (toward the rear of the main unit) just behind
the grooves in the brackets located at the top of the side panels.
Then slide the main unit forward until it stops. WATCH YOUR
FINGERS WHEN DOING THIS!!
Align the holes on the bottom panel of the main unit with the
holes in the brackets on the side panels
(also center the main unit
to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides, as shown in
the illustration), then use the four 6 x 16 millimeter flat-head
screws 4 to attach the main unit. The four screws can be at-
tached from the front.
CAUTION
Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position
shown in the above illustration.
Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or
side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit.
B
B
D
4 x 20 mm tapping screws 3
4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 3
Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 3
Tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 3
4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2
4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2
Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm 2
Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2
57
CLP-950/930
3
X
Fixez le panneau arrière (B)
En inclinant légèrement en angle le panneau arrière, comme
mentionné sur l’illustration, abaissez-le sur le rebord des pieds, à
l’arrière du pédalier. Puis, tout en éliminant les espaces entre les
panneaux arrière et latéraux, fixez le haut du panneau arrière sur
les supports des panneaux latéraux à l’aide de deux vis à tête
ronde 4 x 12 mm 2. Et finalement, fixez le bas du panneau ar-
rière au pédalier avec quatre vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 3.
C
Installez le clavier (A)
Placez le clavier sur les panneaux latéraux (D), avec les vis de
son panneau inférieur (situées vers l’arrière du clavier) placées
immédiatement derrière les rainures des ferrures situées à la
partie supérieure des panneaux latéraux (D), puis faites glisser le
clavier vers l’avant jusqu’à ce qu’il vienne en butée. FAITES
ATTENTION A VOS DOIGTS EN EXECUTANT CETTE
OPERATION!!
Alignez les trous du panneau inférieur du clavier sur les trous
des ferrures des panneaux latéraux
(centrez également le clavier
de manière à avoir un jeu identique de chaque côté) utilisez en-
suite quatre vis de fixation à tête plate de 6 x 16 millimètres 4
pour immobiliser le clavier. Les quatre vis peuvent être fixées par
l’avant.
PRECAUTION
Ne tenez pas le clavier d’une autre manière que celle indiquée sur
l’illustration ci-dessus.
Attention car vous risquez de vous faire pincer les doigts entre le
clavier et les panneaux arrière ou latéraux de sorte que vous devez
veiller à ne pas faire tomber le clavier.
X
Monte el panel trasero (B).
Con el panel trasero un poco inclinado en ángulo como se
muestra en la ilustración, bájelo al borde saliente de las patas de
la parte posterior de la caja de pedales. Entonces, mientras elimi-
na los huelgos entre los paneles trasero y lateral, fije la parte
superior del panel trasero a las ménsulas de panel lateral usando
dos tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2. Finalmente,
fije la parte inferior del panel trasero a la caja de pedales usando
cuatro tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 3.
C
Instale la unidad principal (A).
Coloque la unidad principal en los paneles laterales (D) con
los tornillos de su panel inferior (hacia la parte posterior de la
unidad principal) justo detrás de las ranuras de la ménsula ubica-
da en la parte superior de los paneles laterales (D), después desli-
ce el teclado hacia adelante hasta que se pare. ¡TENGA CUIDA-
DO CON SUS DEDOS MIENTRAS LO HACE!
Alinee los orificios del panel inferior de la unidad principal
con los orificios de las ménsulas de los paneles laterales
(también
centre la unidad principal para producir una holgura igual en los
lados derecho e izquierdo, como se muestra en la ilustración), y
emplee entonces los cuatro tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16
milímetros 4 para montar la unidad principal. Los cuatro torni-
llos pueden colocarse desde delante.
CUIDADO
No sostenga el teclado en ninguna posición que no sea la posición
mostrada en la ilustración de arriba.
Podría pillarse los dedos ente la unidad principal y los paneles trase-
ros o laterales, por lo que deberá tener mucho cuidado que no se
caiga la unidad principal.
A
A
D
10 cm
10 cm
Be sure to place your
hands at least 10
centimeters from either
end of the main unit
when positioning it.
Mindestens 10 cm innen
unter die Tastatureinheit
greifen.
Placez bien vos mains à
10 cm au moins des
extrémités du clavier, lors
de sa mise en place.
Asegúrese de colocar las
manos por lo menos a 10
centímetros desde los
extremos de la unidad
principal cuando la sitúe.
6 x 16 mm flat-head screws 4
6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben 4
Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm 4
Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 mm 4
58
CLP-950/930
4 5
V
Schließen Sie das Pedalkabel an.
Das vom Pedalkasten kommende Pedalkabel wird an die PEDAL-
Buchse hinten an der Unterseite der Tastatureinheit angeschlossen.
Bringen Sie nach dem Anschluß die Kabelhalter an der Rückwand an,
um das Kabel dann in diese Halter zu klemmen.
B
Den Spannungswähler einstellen.
Bevor Sie nun das Netzkabel anschließen, müssen Sie den
Spannungswähler (falls vorhanden) auf die örtliche Netzspannung ein-
stellen. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungswähler mit einem
Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der richtige Spannungswert (110, 127, 220
oder 240) an der Pfeilmarkierung steht. Bei der Auslieferung werden
alle Instrumente mit Spannungswähler auf “240” voreingestellt.
Nachdem Sie den Spannungswähler auf den richtigen Spannungswert
eingestellt haben, stecken Sie das Netzkabel in die AC INLET-Buchse
und schließen es an eine Steckdose an. In manchen Gebieten wird ein
Steckerdapter mitgeliefert, um den Anschluß an die evtl. unterschiedlich
geformte Steckdose zu ermöglichen.
VORSICHT
Eine falsche Spannungseinstellung kann das Clavinova schwer beschädi-
gen und Funktionsstörungen zur Folge haben.
N
Justieren Sie schließlich noch den Höhenversteller.
Zur Stabilisierung ist an der Unterseite des Pedalkastens (C) ein
Höhenversteller vorgesehen. Schrauben Sie den Höhenversteller heraus,
bis er fest auf dem Fußboden steht. Der Höhenversteller sorgt für stabile
Pedalbetätigung und ermöglicht eine präzise Regelung des Betätigungs-
hubs. Wenn er nicht fest auf dem Boden steht, können beim Treten der
Pedale Klangverzerrungen auftreten.
Wenn der Zusammenbau beendet ist, prüfen Sie
bitte folgende Dinge:
Sind Teile übrig geblieben?
Gehen Sie den Vorgang des Zusammenbaus noch einmal durch und
korrigieren Sie eventuelle Fehler.
Befindet sich das Clavinova weit genug von Türen und anderen bewegli-
chen Vorrichtungen entfernt?
Bewegen Sie das Clavinova an einen entsprechend sicheren Ort.
Macht das Clavinova Klappergeräusche, wenn Sie es schütteln?
Ziehen Sie alle Schrauben fest.
Klappert der Pedalkasten oder gibt er nach, wenn Sie das Pedal treten?
Drehen Sie den Höhenversteller, bis er fest auf dem Fußboden steht.
Sind Pedal-und Netzkabel richtig an den Buchsen angeschlossen?
Prüfen Sie die Verbindung.
Wenn die Haupteinheit knarrt oder beim Spielen wackelt, betrachten Sie
die Abbildungen und ziehen Sie alle Schrauben noch einmal nach.
A
C
I
N
L
E
T
P
C
-
1
P
C
-
2
M
a
c
M
I
D
I
240
127
110
220
AC INLET
Cord holder
Kabelhalter
Serre-câble
Soporte del cable
A voltage selector is provided in some
areas.
Spannungswähler
(nur in bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten)
Un sélecteur de tension est prévu
pour certaines régions
El selector de tensión está provisto
para ciertos destinos.
V
Connect the pedal cord.
The pedal cord from the pedal box must be plugged into the
PEDAL connector located at the rear of the main unit’s under-
side. Once connected, attach the cord holders to the rear panel
as shown, then clip the cord into the holders.
B
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of
the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the
selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a
“minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the cor-
rect voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the
panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is ini-
tially shipped.
After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC
power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug
adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin
configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.
CAUTION
An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the
Clavinova or result in improper operation.
N
Set the adjuster.
For stability, an adjuster is provided on the bottom of the
pedal box (C). Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact
with the floor surface. The adjuster ensures stable pedal opera-
tion and facilitates pedal effect control. If the adjuster is not in
firm contact with the floor surface, distorted sound may result.
After completing the assembly, please
check the following.
Are there any parts left over?
Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors.
Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures?
Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.
Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it?
Tighten all screws.
Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals?
Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor.
Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets?
Check the connection.
If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the
keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.
Use the vinyl tie that was removed from the bundled pedal cord in
step
Z
to tie up any slack in the pedal cord.
Nehmen Sie überlanges Kabel mit dem in Schritt
Z
entfernten
Kabelbinder auf.
Utilisez lattache en vinyle qui a été enlevée du cordon de pédalier à
l’étape
Z
pour attacher le fil excédentaire du cordon de pédalier.
Emplee la abrazadera de vinilo que se sacó del cale plegado de los
pedales en el paso
Z
para fijar el cable de pedales sobrante.
P
C-
1
P
C-2
Mac
M
IDI
P
ED
A
L
Nach dem Zusammenbau müssen Sie den Tastatur-Sicherungsdraht
entfernen. Diese Arbeit wird nur einmal ausgeführt, und der Draht
braucht später nicht wieder angebracht zu werden. Anweisungen hierzu
entnehmen Sie bitte dem unter der Tastaturabdeckung auf den Tasten
liegenden Hinweisblatt (siehe Seite 10).
After assembly is complete, it will be necessary to remove the key-
board string. This procedure is performed once only and the string
will never have to be reattached again. For instructions on its re-
moval, refer to the paper titled "REQUEST" that can be found on the
keys underneath the key cover (see page 10).
59
CLP-950/930
V
Raccordez le câble du pédalier
Le câble du pédalier qui sort du logement de pédalier doit être
raccordé au connecteur PEDAL implanté à l’arrière du panneau de
dessus de l’instrument. Une fois branché, fixez les attaches de câble
sur la face arrière en procédant de la façon représentée sur la figure
puis emboîtez le câble dans les attaches.
B
Sélecteur de tension
Avant de connecter le cordon d’alimentation, vérifiez le réglage du
sélecteur de tension qui est prévu pour certaines régions. Pour régler le
sélecteur sur 110 V, 127 V, 220 V ou 240 V, utilisez un tournevis à lame
plate pour tourner le cadran du sélecteur afin de mettre l’indication corres-
pondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur
le panneau. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d’usine.
Après avoir choisi la tension appropriée, branchez le cordon d’alimenta-
tion secteur dans la prise AC INLET de l’instrument et une prise de sortie
secteur. Un adaptateur de prise peut également être fourni dans certaines
régions pour pouvoir brancher le cordon à la prise secteur murale.
PRECAUTION
Vous risquez de sérieusement endommager le Clavinova ou de provoquer
un fonctionnement anormal de linstrument en ne choisissant pas correc-
tement la tension dalimentation.
N
N’oubliez pas de régler la hauteur du pédalier
Pour assurer la stabilité du pédalier (C), un dispositif de réglage a été
prévu à sa partie inférieure. Tournez ce dispositif jusqu’à ce qu’il soit en
contact ferme avec la surface du sol. Ce dispositif assure la stabilité du
pédalier lors de son utilisation et facilite la commande au pied des effets.
Si ce dispositif n’est pas en contact ferme avec le sol, il pourra se produire
une distorsion du son.
Lorsque le montage est terminé, veuillez mener
à bien les vérifications suivantes.
Reste-t-il des pièces non utilisées?
Passer en revue la procédure de montage et corriger toute erreur éventuelle.
Le Clavinova est-il placé à l’écart des portes et de toute autre structure mobile?
Déplacer le Clavinova vers un emplacement approprié.
Lorsque vous secouez quelque peu le Clavinova, entendez-vous un cliquetis?
Serrer convenablement toutes les vis.
Le pédalier fait-il du bruit ou s’écarte-t-il lorsque vous appuyez sur les pédales?
Tourner le stabilisateur de sorte que le Clavinova repose fermement sur le sol.
Les cordons des pédales et dalimentation sont-ils bien enfoncés dans les prises?
Vérifier toutes les connexions.
Si la partie principale de lappareil craque ou est instable lorsque vous jouez sur le
clavier, consulter les diagrammes de montage et resserrer toutes les vis.
V
Conecte el cable de los pedales.
El cable de los pedales procedente de la caja de pedales debe enchufarse
al conector PEDAL situado en la parte posterior del lado inferior de la
unidad principal. Una vez se ha conectado, coloque los soportes de cable del
panel posterior como se muestra, y sujete el cable en los soportes.
B
Selector de tensión
Antes de conectar el cable de alimentación de CA, compruebe el ajuste
del selector de tensión que se incorpora para ciertos destinos. Para ajustar el
selector a 110V, 127V, 220V ó 240V de la red de alimentación, emplee un
destornillador de cabeza recta “-” para girar el selector de modo que la
tensión correcta de su zona aparezca al lado del indicador del panel. El
selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica.
Después de haber seleccionado la tensión correcta, enchufe el cable de
alimentación de CA a la toma AC INLET y a una toma de corriente de la
pared. En algunas zonas puede suministrarse también un adaptador para
adaptar la configuración de las patillas de los tomacorrientes de CA de su
localidad.
CUIDADO
Un ajuste incorrecto de la tensión puede causar daños serios a la
Clavinova o ser motivo de mal funcionamiento.
N
Asegúrese de ajustar el ajustador.
Para la estabilidad del aparato, se proporciona un ajustador en la parte
inferior de la caja de pedales (C). Gire el ajustador hasta que contacte
firmemente con el suelo. El ajustador asegura una operación estable de los
pedales y facilita el control del efecto de los pedales. Si el ajustador no
contacta firmemente con el suelo, puede resultar en sonido distorsionado.
Cuando haya concluido el montaje, comprue-
be los siguientes puntos:
•¿Ha quedado alguna pieza sin instalar?
Revise el procedimiento de montaje y corrija cualquier error que se
haya podido cometer.
•¿Está el Clavinova alejado del recorrido de puertas y muebles?
Traslade el Clavinova a una posición adecuada.
•¿Suena algún ruido de holgura cuando se mueve el Clavinova?
Apriete con firmeza todos los tornillos.
•¿Vibra o cede la caja de pedales cuando se pisan los pedales?
Gire el estabilizador hasta que apoye firmemente sobre el suelo.
•¿Están perfectamente insertados los cables de pedal y alimentación en
los conectores?
Revise las conexiones.
Si la unidad principal cruje o presenta algún signo de inestabilidad
cuando se toca el teclado, consulte los esquemas de montajee y vuelva
a apretar todos los tornillos.
C
6
CAUTION
When moving the instrument after assembly, always
hold the lower surface of the main unit, NEVER the
top portion or keyboard cover. Improper handling can
result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.
VORSICHT
Fassen Sie zum Umstellen des Instruments nach
dem Zusammenbau stets unter das Gehäuse; heben
Sie es NIEMALS am oberen Teil des Gehäuses oder
am Tastaturdeckel. Bei Nichtbeachtung dieses
Punkts kann das Instrument beschädigt und im
Extremfall eine Verletzung hervorgerufen werden.
PRECAUTION
Pour déplacer linstrument après le montage, tou-
jours tenir linstrument par la surface inférieure,
JAMAIS par sa partie supérieure ou par le protège-
clavier. Une mauvaise manipulation peut provoquer
des dommages ou des blessures.
CUIDADO
Cuando mueva el instrumento después del montaje,
sostenga siempre la superficie inferior de la unidad
principal, y NUNCA la parte superior de la cubierta
del teclado. La manipulación indebida puede causar
daños en el instrumento o personales.
Dès que lassemblage est complètement terminé, la corde de clavier
doit être retirée. Ceci nest exécuté quune seule fois et il ne sera plus
nécessaire de fixer la corde à nouveau. En ce qui concerne les instruc-
tions pour retirer cette corde, veuillez vous référer à la page intitulée
REQUEST qui est placée sur les touches du clavier sous le couvre-
clavier (voir page 10).
Después de haber terminado el montaje, será necesario extraer la
cuerda del teclado. Este procedimiento sólo se lleva a cabo una vez y
la cuerda no se tendrá que volver a atar nunca más. Para las instruc-
ciones sobre la extracción de la cuerda, consulte el documento titulado
RUEGO que encontrará sobre las teclas debajo de la cubierta del
teclado (vea la página 10).
60
CLP-950/930
KEYBOARD
POLYPHONY
VOICE SELECTORS
REVERB
EFFECT
TOUCH SENSITIVITY
SONG CONTROLS
PEDAL CONTROLS
OTHER CONTROLS
JACKS/CONNECTORS
INPUT & OUTPUT
LEVEL/IMPEDANCE
MAIN AMPLIFIERS
SPEAKERS
DIMENTIONS
without music stand
(W x D x H)
with music stand
WEIGHT
CLP-950/950M/950C CLP-930
88 KEYS (A-1 ~ C7)
64 NOTES MAX.
12 voices 8 voices
ROOM, HALL 1, HALL 2, STAGE
CHORUS, PHASER, TREMOLO, DELAY
HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT, FIXED
TRACK 1, TRACK 2, SONG [START/STOP], REC
SOFT, SOSTENUTO, DAMPER
MASTER VOLUME, BRILLIANCE (CLP-950), DEMO, TRANSPOSE, FUNCTION,
METRONOME [START/STOP], TEMPO/FUNCTION [t]/[s], [–/NO]/[[+/YES],
PRESET SONG, SPLIT (CLP-950), LED Display
PHONES x 2, AUX OUT R & L/L+R, AUX IN R & L/L+R,
MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, HOST SELECT, TO HOST, PEDAL*
AUX OUT: Output impedance 600
AUX IN: Input impedance 10 k / Input sensitivity 0.26V
60W x 2 20W x 2
14 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2 16 cm x 2
1372 x 504 x 843 mm (54" x 19-7/8" x 33-1/4") 1370 x 501 x 843 mm (54" x 19-3/4" x 33-1/4")
1372 x 504 x 1028 mm (54" x 19-7/8" x 40-1/2") 1370 x 501 x 1030 mm (54" x 19-3/4" x 40-1/2")
68.0 kg (149.9 lbs.) 50.0 kg (110.2 lbs.)
Specifications/Technische Daten/Caractéristiques techniques/Especificaciones
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.
Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time
without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der
Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische
Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die
technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind,
setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung.
Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que
pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et
leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les
caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à
l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.
Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito
de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o
modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso.
Puesto que las especificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos
los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha.
* The CLP-950 PEDAL connector is not accessible from the outside of the instrument’s cabinet (it is
internally connected to the pedal unit during the assembly procedure).
* Die PEDAL-Buchse des CLP-950 ist im Gehäuse verborgen und von außen her nicht zugänglich (der
Kabelstecker muß beim Zusammenbau des Instruments angeschlossen werden).
* Le connecteur de pédale CLP-950 PEDAL n’est pas accessible de l’extérieur de l’ébénisterie de
l’instrument (il est connecté au pédalier par connexion interne au cours des opérations d’assemblage).
* El conector de PEDAL del CLP-950 no puede accederse desde fuera de la caja del instrumento (se
conecta internamente a la unidad de pedales durante el procedimiento de montaje).
61
CLP-950/930
MEMO
NOTIZEN
NOTES
MEMORANDUM ..............................................................................................................................
MEMO
NOTIZEN
NOTES
MEMORANDUM ..............................................................................................................................
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic prod-
uct, basic precautions should always be followed. These pre-
cautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions,
Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions
found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, in-
cluding connection to the main supply.
2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area
where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt
exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact
your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable)
instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the
name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic
found in the Special Message Section of this manual.
3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug
(one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the
plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the
problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete
outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4. Some electronic products utilize external power sup-
plies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any
power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners
manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by
Yamaha.
5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other
objects on the power cord or place it in a position where any-
one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or
connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is
not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the
minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE:
The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling
capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electri-
cian.
6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in loca-
tions that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instruc-
tions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be
assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.
7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products
should be installed in locations that do not significantly con-
tribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this prod-
uct close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and
other devices that produce heat should be avoided.
8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-
tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam-
ples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,
sink, or wet basement.
9. This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the
manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all
safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from
the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for ex-
tended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when
there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm
activity.
11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain: or
d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de-
scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-
fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT
operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or
ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-
sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the
product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are de-
signed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that
benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are
well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are
designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted
by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio
frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instruc-
tions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful
to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC
regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in
all installations. If this product is found to be the source of inter-
ference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker
or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the an-
tenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type
of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Divi-
sion, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed
by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-
dance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals
in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-
nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of
the three pin plug.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU
FOND.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.
(class B)
(2 wires)
(polarity)
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous gurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America,
Keyboard Division
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panama S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Home Keyboard Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain
Tel: 91-201-0700
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-881-5868
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3486-0011
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria
3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273
[CL] 21
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2000 Yamaha Corporation
V495600 0??POZC??.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia
Clavinova Web site (English only)
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/
Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Transcripción de documentos

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL IMPORTANT WICHTIG IMPORTANT IMPORTANTE Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. Überprüfung der Stromversorgung Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Anschließen an das Stromnetz, daß die örtliche Netzspannung den Betriebsspannungswerten auf dem Typenschild an der Unterseite des Instruments entspricht. In bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten ist das Instrument mit einem Spannungswähler an der Unterseite neben der Netzkabeldurchführung ausgestattet. Falls vorhanden, muß der Spannungswähler auf die örtliche Netzspannung eingestellt werden. Der Spannungswähler wurde werkseitig auf 240 V voreingestellt. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungsregler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der Zeiger auf den korrekten Spannungswert weist. Contrôler la source d’alimentation Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l’instrument peut être équipé d’un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d’alimentation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d’usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l’indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Verifique la alimentación de corriente Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su área corresponde con la tensión especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza “recta” para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel. SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. CLP-950/950M/950C SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. CLP-930 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 Model _____________________________________ Serial No. __________________________________ Purchase Date ______________________________ PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover gap. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. ■USING THE BENCH (if included) • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. ■SAVING USER DATA Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1)B-6 CLP-950/930 3 Introduction Thank you for choosing a Yamaha Clavinova. Your Clavinova is a fine musical instrument that employs advanced Yamaha music technology. With the proper care, your Clavinova will give you many years of musical pleasure. ● The Clavinova CLP-950/930 digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playability with Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology on the CLP-950 and “AWM Stereo Sampling” on the CLP-930 for rich, musical voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard which provides graded key weight and response throughout the keyboard range. The grand piano voices feature totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full concert grand piano. The CLP-950 GRAND PIANO 1 voice features multiple velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a “Soundboard Reverb” effect which accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, special “Sustain Samples” which recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Key-off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. ● Dual mode allows 2 voices to be played simultaneously. ● Split mode (CLP-950) allows different voices to be played by the left and right hands. ● Metronome feature with variable tempo facilitates practice. ● 2-track digital recorder lets you record and play back anything you play on the keyboard. ● MIDI compatibility and a range of MIDI functions make the Clavinova useful in a range of advanced MIDI music systems. ● Built-in computer interface for direct connection to personal computers running advanced music software. The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop-type personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, we urge you to read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. * The models CLP-950M and CLP-950C will be referred to as the CLP-950 in this Owner’s Manual. ■ Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Included Accessories ● Owner’s Manual ● Bench (included or optional depending on locale) ● “50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Home Page: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ 4 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Contents The Control Panel .......................................................... 6 Connections ................................................................... 8 Key Cover & Music Stand ............................................ 10 Selecting & Playing Voices .......................................... 11 Playing the Demonstration Tunes ................................ 12 ■ Voice Demo .............................................................. 12 Preset Song ............................................................. 13 ■ Preset Song A-B Repeat ......................................... 14 ■ Preset Song Part Cancel ........................................ 15 ● Synchro Start ..................................................... 15 ● Left Pedal Start/Stop ......................................... 15 ■ The Dual Mode ............................................................ 16 ● Other Dual Mode Functions ............................... 16 The Split Mode (CLP-950) ............................................... 17 Selecting the Right and Left Voices ................... 17 Setting the Split Point ........................................ 17 ● Other Split Mode Functions ............................... 17 F3.4: 2nd Voice Octave Shift ................................ 29 F3.5: 1st Voice Effect Depth ................................. 30 F3.6: 2nd Voice Effect Depth ................................ 30 F3.7: Reset ........................................................... 30 ■ F4: CLP-950 Split Mode Functions ........................ 30 F4.1: Split Point .................................................... 30 F4.2: Split Balance ............................................... 30 F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift .............................. 31 F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift ................................ 31 F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth .............................. 31 F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth ................................ 31 F4.7: Damper Range ............................................ 31 F4.8: Reset ........................................................... 31 ■ ■ F4: CLP-930 Left Pedal Mode ................................. 31 F5: CLP-950 Pedal Functions ................................. 32 F5.1: Left Pedal Mode .......................................... 32 F5.2: Sustain Sample Depth ................................ 32 ■ ■ F5: CLP-930 Metronome Volume ............................ 32 F6: CLP-950 Metronome Volume ............................ 32 ■ ■ F6: CLP-930 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ..... 32 F7: CLP-950 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume ..... 32 ● ● Reverb ........................................................................ 18 ● Adjusting Reverb Depth ..................................... 18 The Effect .................................................................... 19 ● Adjusting Effect Depth ....................................... 19 Brilliance (CLP-950) ........................................................ 19 The Pedals ................................................................... 20 Damper (Right) Pedal ........................................ 20 Sostenuto (Center) Pedal .................................. 20 ● Soft (Left) Pedal ................................................. 20 ● ● Touch Sensitivity ......................................................... 21 Transposition ............................................................... 21 Tuning ......................................................................... 22 Tuning Up ........................................................... 22 Tuning Down ...................................................... 22 ● To Restore Standard Pitch ................................. 22 ● ● The Metronome & Tempo Control ................................ 23 ■ The Metronome ........................................................ 23 Metronome Time Signature ............................... 23 ● Metronome Volume Function ............................. 23 ■ Tempo Control ......................................................... 23 ● Using the User Song Recorder ..................................... 24 ■ Recording ................................................................ 24 ● Changing the Initial Settings .............................. 25 ● Erasing a Single Track ....................................... 25 ■ Playback ................................................................... 26 ● Synchro Start ..................................................... 26 ● Left Pedal Start/Stop ......................................... 26 ■ ■ F7: CLP-930 MIDI Functions ................................... 33 F8: CLP-950 MIDI Functions ................................... 33 ● A Brief Introduction to MIDI ............................... 33 F7.1/F8.1: MIDI Transmit Channel Selection ........ 33 F7.2/F8.2: MIDI Receive Channel Selection ........ 33 F7.3/F8.3: Local Control ON/OFF ........................ 34 F7.4/F8.4: Program Change ON/OFF .................. 34 F7.5/F8.5: Control Change ON/OFF .................... 35 F7.6/F8.6: MIDI Transmit Transpose ..................... 35 F7.7/F8.7: Panel/Status Transmit ......................... 35 F7.8/F8.8: Bulk Data Dump .................................. 35 ■ F8: CLP-930 Backup Functions ............................. 36 ■ F9: CLP-950 Backup Functions ............................. 36 F8.1/F9.1: Voice ................................................... 36 F8.2/F9.2: MIDI .................................................... 36 F8.3/F9.3: Tuning .................................................. 36 F8.4/F9.4: Pedal ................................................... 36 Connecting to a Personal Computer ............................. 37 Connecting to an Apple Macintosh Series Computer .... 37 Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ........ 38 ● Using a USB Interface (such as the Yamaha UX256) .... 39 ● ● Factory Preset Recall .................................................. 40 Troubleshooting ........................................................... 40 Options & Expander Modules ...................................... 40 The Function Mode ...................................................... 27 ● To Select a Function … ...................................... 27 F1: Tuning ................................................................ 28 ■ F2: Scale .................................................................. 28 F2.1: Scale ........................................................... 28 F2.2: Base Note ................................................... 28 ■ F3: Dual Mode Functions ....................................... 29 F3.1: Dual Balance ............................................... 29 F3.2: Dual Detune ................................................ 29 F3.3: 1st Voice Octave Shift ................................. 29 ■ Voice Descriptions ............................................................. 41 Demo Song List .................................................................. 42 Factory Setting List ............................................................ 42 MIDI Data Format ................................................................ 43 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................................... 47 CLP-950: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................... 48 CLP-930: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................... 54 Specifications ..................................................................... 60 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 5 The Control Panel CLP-930 CLP-930 ON MIN ON START/ STOP TEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC MAX MASTER VOLUME DEMO TRANSPOSE FUNCTION 2 5 4 METRONOME SONG 6 7 8 9 ON START/ STOP TEMPO/FUNCTION 0 ! @ CLP-950 CLP-950 ON MIN MAX MELLOW MASTER VOLUME BRILLIANCE 2 DEMO TRANSPOSE FUNCTION 3 CLP-950 MIN MELLOW ON START/ STOP TEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG 6 5 4 ON MAX MASTER VOLUME TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC BRIGHT –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC METRONOME 7 GRAND GRAND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSIPIANO 1 PIANO 2 1 2 CHORD VIBRA- CHURCH JAZZ STRINGS PHONE ORGAN ORGAN BRIGHT BRILLIANCE DEMO TRANSPOSE FUNCTION METRONOME SONG SONG 8 VOICE CHOIR 9 WOOD BASS E. BASS SPLIT ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT 0 ! @ HARD MEDIUM SOFT TOUCH POWER 1 A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 Tuning keys (See page 22) CLP-950 PHONES jacks on bottom panel (see page 10) 1 [POWER] Switch Press the [POWER] switch once to turn the power ON, a second time to turn the power OFF. When the power is initially turned ON, a voice selector LED will light, and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard will light. 2 [MASTER VOLUME] Control The [MASTER VOLUME] control adjusts the volume (level) of sound produced by the Clavinova’s internal stereo sound system. The [MASTER VOLUME] control also adjusts headphone volume when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack (page 10). 3 [BRILLIANCE] Control (CLP-950) The [BRILLIANCE] Control adjusts the tonality or “timbre” of the output sound from a mellow tone to a bright tone. 4 [DEMO] Button Activates the demo playback mode in which you can select playback of different demonstration 6 CLP-950/930 sequences for each of the Clavinova’s voices. See page 12 for details. 5 [TRANSPOSE] Button The [TRANSPOSE] button allows access to the Clavinova’s TRANSPOSE function (to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals). 6 [FUNCTION] Button This button accesses a range of utility functions — including the MIDI functions — that significantly enhance versatility and playability. See page 27 for details. 7 METRONOME [START/STOP] Button Turns the metronome sound on and off. The [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons are used to set the tempo of the metronome sound. The [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons are used to change the time signature (beat) of the metronome if used while the METRONOME [START/STOP] button is held — page 23. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Control Panel GRAND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSI- VIBRA- CHURCH STRINGS CHOIR PIANO 1 2 CHORD PHONE ORGAN ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE VOICE CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY HARD MEDIUM SOFT REVERB EFFECT TOUCH % ^ & ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY HARD # * Soft pedal GRAND GRAND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSI- VIBRA- CHURCH JAZZ STRINGS CHOIR PIANO 1 PIANO 2 1 2 CHORD PHONE ORGAN ORGAN WOOD BASS E. BASS SPLIT VOICE # MEDIUM SOFT REVERB EFFECT TOUCH % ^ & $ Damper pedal Sostenuto pedal 8 [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] Buttons These buttons adjust the tempo of the metronome function as well as the playback tempo of the recorder function. The tempo range is from 32 to 280 beats per minute — page 23. These same buttons are also used to select functions — page 27. There is also a dual mode in which two voices can be played simultaneously across the full range of the keyboard (see page 16 for details), and a split mode on the CLP-950 which allows different voices to be played by the left and right hands (see page 17 for details). 9 [–/NO], [+/YES] Buttons These buttons select a preset song number for playback, and are also used to adjust a range of other parameters. $ [SPLIT] Button (CLP-950) Engages the split mode, in which different voices can be played on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. See page 17 for details. 0 [PRESET SONG] Button This button enters the preset song mode. While in this mode you can use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select from 50 songs. % [REVERB] Button The [REVERB] button selects a number of digital reverb effects that you can use for extra depth and expressive power. See page 18 for details. ! TRACK [1] and [2] Buttons The Clavinova has a 2-track recorder, and these buttons are used to select the track(s) to be recorded or played back. See page 24 for details. ^ [EFFECT] Button This button selects a number of effects which can give your sound greater depth and animation. @ SONG [START/STOP] and [REC] Buttons These buttons control the Clavinova’s user song recorder, letting you record and play back just about anything you play on the keyboard. # Voice Selectors Simply press any of the voice selectors to select the corresponding voice. The voice selector LED will light to indicate which voice is currently selected. & [TOUCH] Button The [TOUCH] button makes it easy to adjust the touch response of the Clavinova to match your playing style. See page 21 for details. * Pedals The soft (left), sostenuto (center) and damper (right) pedals provide a range of expressive control capabilities similar to the pedal functions on an acoustic piano. See page 20 for details. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 7 Connections CAUTION • Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all-volume levels to minimum. CLP-930 Bottom Panel MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L/L+R R OUT IN MIDI PC-2 L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN 1 TO HOST 2 PEDAL HOST SELECT 3 4 5 CLP-950 Bottom Panel IN OUT THRU L/L+R PC-2 MIDI MIDI HOST SELECT 4 TO HOST 3 L/L+R R AUX IN 2 AUX OUT 1 1 AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks The AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output of the Clavinova for connection to an instrument amplifier, mixing console, PA system, or recording equipment. If you will be connecting the Clavinova to a monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/ L+R jack only, the left- and right-channel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you don’t lose any of the Clavinova’s sound. Stereo System R R PC-1 Mac CAUTION L/L+R CLP-930 AUX OUT • When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external sound system, first turn the Clavinova power on, and then the power to the external amplifier/ speaker system. Reverse this order when turning the power off. • The AUX OUT jack signal must never be returned to the AUX IN jacks, either directly or through external equipment. • The AUX OUT jack signal is not controlled by the Clavinova’s volume or brilliance (CLP-950) control. Use the volume control on the external audio equipment to adjust the level. DOU-10 R L/L+R AUX IN CLP-930 2 AUX IN L/L+R and R Jacks These jacks are intended for use with an external tone generator module such as the Yamaha DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit. The stereo outputs from the external tone generator module are connected to the AUX IN L/L+R and R jacks, allowing the sound of the tone generator to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. A line-level mono source can be connected to the L/L+R jack. CAUTION • When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external source, first turn the power to the external device on, and then the power to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when turning the power off. • The input signal from the AUX IN jacks is controlled by the Clavinova’s volume and brilliance (CLP-950) controls. Reverb and effect functions will have no affect. • The input signal from the AUX IN jacks is delivered to the AUX OUT jacks. 8 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Connections 3 TO HOST Connector & HOST SELECT Switch This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a personal computer for sequencing and other music applications — without the need for a separate MIDI interface. See page 37 for details. Personal Computer Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 CLP-930 HOST SELECT MIDI THRU OUT IN Tone Generator DOU-10 CLP-930 4 MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external MIDI device (such as the DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit) which can be used to control the Clavinova. The MIDI THRU connector retransmits any data received at the MIDI IN connector, allowing “chaining” of several MIDI instruments or other devices. The MIDI OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the Clavinova (e.g. note and velocity data produced by playing the Clavinova keyboard). More details on MIDI are given in “MIDI Functions” on page 33. 5 PEDAL Jack (CLP-930) This terminal is for connecting the pedal cord from the pedal box (refer to the “Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages 55-59). ● PHONES Jacks (Bottom Panel) Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into either of the PHONES jacks. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 9 Key Cover & Music Stand Key Cover To open the key cover: Z Lift the cover slightly. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. X Slide the cover open. To close the key cover: Z Slide the cover toward you. X Gently lower the cover over the keys. CLP-930 CAUTION • Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the cover and main unit. • Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the main unit when the cover is opened and may not be able to be removed. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. Music Stand The Clavinova is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the holes at the top of panel. NOTE • The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop-type personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. CLP-930 10 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Selecting & Playing Voices Turn Power On ................................................................................................... After making sure that the Clavinova’s AC cord is properly plugged into the Clavinova itself and plugged into a convenient AC wall outlet, press the [POWER] switch located to the right of the keyboard to turn the power ON. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. When the power is turned ON, one of the voice selector LEDs will light, and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard will light. POWER Set the Volume .................................................................................................. MIN MAX Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] control about half way between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control for the most comfortable listening level. MASTER VOLUME Select a Voice ..................................................................................................... Select the desired voice by pressing one of the voice selectors. NOTE • See “Voice Descriptions” on page 41. CLP-950 GRAND GRAND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSI- VIBRA- CHURCH JAZZ STRINGS CHOIR PIANO 1 PIANO 2 1 2 CHORD PHONE ORGAN ORGAN WOOD BASS E. BASS VOICE Play ................................................................................................................................ The Clavinova also offers keyboard touch response, so the volume and timbre of notes played can be controlled according to how “hard” you play the keys. The amount of variation available depends on the selected voice. NOTE ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT MELLOW • Some voices do not have keyboard touch response. See “Voice Descriptions” on page 41 for details. Add Effects As Required ....................................................................... You can add or change reverb, effects and brilliance (CLP-950) as desired by using the [REVERB] button (page 18), [EFFECT] button (page 19) and the [BRILLIANCE] control (page 19). BRIGHT BRILLIANCE ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 11 Playing the Demonstration Tunes Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the Clavinova’s voices. There are also 50 preset songs that you can play individually, all in sequence, or in random order. The “50 greats for the Clavinova” score collection provided with the Clavinova includes the written scores for all 50 preset songs. Here’s how you can select and play the demo tunes. NOTE • The demo or preset song mode cannot be engaged while a user song recorder (page 24) is in use. • No MIDI reception occurs in the demo/preset song mode. • The demo/preset song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors. * See page 42 for a complete listing of the demo tunes. Voice Demo Engage the Demo Mode ......................................................................... DEMO Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode — the voice selector indicators will flash in sequence. Play a Voice Demo ......................................................................................... CLP-930 GRAND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSI- VIBRA- CHURCH STRINGS CHOIR PIANO 1 2 CHORD PHONE ORGAN VOICE Press one of the voice selectors to start playback of all songs starting from the corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice normally selected by that voice selector button. (If you press the SONG [START/STOP] button instead of a voice selector button, the GRAND PIANO 1 (GRAND PIANO: CLP-930) demo tune will begin playback.) The indicator of the selected voice selector button will flash during playback, and “- - -” will appear on the LED display. You can start playback of any other voice demo tune during playback by simply pressing the corresponding voice selector. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button or the voice selector of the currently playing demo. NOTE • Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume and the [BRILLIANCE] control (CLP-950) to adjust the brilliance (page 19). Exit From the Demo Mode .................................................................... DEMO 12 CLP-950/930 Press the [DEMO] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the normal play mode. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Playing the Demonstration Tunes Preset Song –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC Engage the Preset Song Mode ....................................................... Press the [PRESET SONG] button to engage the preset song mode — the [PRESET SONG], TRACK [1] and [2] indicators will light. SONG Play a Preset Song ....................................................................................... –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC SONG TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG To play any of the 50 preset songs provided, use the [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons to select the number of the tune you want to play (the number will appear on the LED display), then press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback will stop automatically when playback of the selected preset song has finished. Select “ALL” instead of a number to play all preset songs in sequence, or select “rnd” to continuously play all preset songs in random order. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. • Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume. • You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼,▲] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. This produces a relative tempo variation, with a range from “-50” through “- - -” to “50” at maximum; the range will differ depending on the selected song. • The default tempo “- - -” is automatically selected whenever a new preset song is selected, or playback of a new preset song begins during “ALL” or “rnd” playback. • You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. The voice playing on the keyboard can be changed. • You can change the Brilliance control (CLP-950) and Reverb type that is applied to the voice you play on the keyboard and for the preset song playback. You can change the Effect type and Touch sensitivity that is applied to the voice you play on the keyboard. When a new preset song is selected or a new preset song is automatically started in continuous play, the HALL 1 reverb type will automatically be selected. –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC Exit From the Preset Song Mode .................................................. Press the [PRESET SONG] button to exit from the preset song mode, the indicator will go off, and return to the normal play mode. SONG ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 13 Playing the Demonstration Tunes Preset Song A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a specified phrase within a preset song. Combined with the Part Cancel function described below, this provides an excellent way to practice difficult phrases. Specify the Beginning (A) of the Phrase .............................. ON TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG Select and play a preset song, then press the [FUNCTION] button at the beginning of the phrase you want to repeat. This sets the “A” point (“A-” will appear on the display). To set the “A” point at the very beginning of the song, press the [FUNCTION] button before starting playback. FUNCTION Specify the End (B) of the Phrase ............................................... ON TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG Press the [FUNCTION] button a second time at the end of the phrase. This sets the “B” point (“A-b” will appear on the display). At this point repeat playback will begin between the specified A and B points. The metronome will sound when playback begins to give you a tempo reference. However, if playback repeats from the beginning of the song, there will be no tempo reference from metronome. To set the B point at the song’s end, press the [FUNCTION] button after song playback is complete and before “A- ” disappears from the display. FUNCTION Stop Playback .................................................................................................... –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 SONG TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback while retaining the specified A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume if the SONG [START/STOP] button is then pressed again. To cancel the A and B points press the [FUNCTION] button once. NOTE • The A and B points are automatically canceled when a new song is selected. • The A-B Repeat function cannot be used during “ALL” or “rnd” playback. 14 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Playing the Demonstration Tunes Preset Song Part Cancel The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts that can be turned on and off as required so you can practice the corresponding part on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by TRACK [1] track, and the left-hand part is played by TRACK [2] track. Turn the Desired Part Off ....................................................................... –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC Press the TRACK [1] or [2] button to turn the corresponding part off — the corresponding indicator will go out (these buttons alternately toggle the corresponding part on and off). SONG NOTE • The parts can be turned on or off even during playback. • The Preset Song Part Cancel function cannot be used during “ALL” or “rnd” playback. • The “Preset Song Part Cancel Volume” function described on page 32 can be used to set the canceled part so that it plays at a volume from “0” (no sound) to “20”. The default setting is “5”. • Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever a new song is selected. –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC Start/Stop Playback ..................................................................................... Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start and stop playback as required. SONG Synchro Start ..................................................................................................... –/NO +/YES PRESET SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 SONG TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG START/ STOP REC When the Synchro Start function is engaged, playback of the selected preset song will begin automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard. To engage the Synchro Start function press the SONG [START/ STOP] button while holding the part button corresponding to the part which is ON. A dot will appear in the lower right corner of the display. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Syncro Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. NOTE • If you hold a track button which is OFF while pressing the SONG [START/ STOP] button, that track will be turned ON and the Synchro Start mode will be engaged. Left Pedal Start/Stop .................................................................................. The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop preset song playback via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on pages 31 (CLP-930) and 32 (CLP-950). ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 15 The Dual Mode The dual mode makes it possible to play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. To activate the dual mode simply press two voice selectors at the same time (or press one voice selector while holding another). The voice indicators of both selected voices will light when the dual mode is active. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice selector. According to the voice numbering priority as shown in the diagram on the left, lower valued voice numbers will be designated as the 1st Voice (the other voice will be designated as the 2nd Voice). AND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSI- VIBRA- CHU NO 2 1 2 CHORD PHONE ORG Voice numbering priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GRAND GRAND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSI- VIBRA- CHURCH JAZZ STRINGS CHOIR PIANO 1 PIANO 2 1 2 CHORD PHONE ORGAN ORGAN WOOD BASS • The dual and split modes (CLP-950) cannot be engaged at the same time. NOTE • [EFFECT] in the Dual Mode Depending upon the conditions one effect type will take priority over the other. Depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F3 (see page 29) you can change the depth value for each voice as you like. Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/ YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button — see page 19) will be applied to the 1st Voice only. E. BASS VOICE CLP-950 • [REVERB] in the Dual Mode The reverb type assigned to the 1st Voice will take priority over the other. (If the reverb is set to OFF, the 2nd Voice’s reverb type will be in affect.) Reverb depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/ YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button — see page 18) will be applied to the 1st Voice only. Other Dual Mode Functions ............................................................... The Clavinova Function mode provides access to a number of other dual-mode functions, listed below. See the corresponding pages for details. • • • • • • • 16 CLP-950/930 Dual Balance ................................................. Dual Detune .................................................. 1st Voice Octave Shift ................................... 2nd Voice Octave Shift .................................. 1st Voice Effect Depth ................................... 2nd Voice Effect Depth .................................. Reset ............................................................. 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Split Mode (CLP-950) The split mode makes it possible to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. The Left Voice is played on all keys to the left of (and including) a specified “split point” key, while the Right Voice is played on all keys to the right of the split point key. To activate the split mode simply press the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator lights. The split mode can be turned off at any time by pressing the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out. SPLIT • The dual and split modes cannot be engaged at the same time. NOTE Selecting the Right and Left Voices ..................................................... RPSI- VIBRA- CHURCH JAZZ STRIN ORD PHONE ORGAN ORGAN SPLIT VOICE The voice that was selected before the split mode was engaged becomes the Right Voice in the split mode. (The Right Voice can also be changed while in the split mode, by simply pressing the corresponding voice selector.) To select a Left Voice press the corresponding voice selector while holding the [SPLIT] button (default: [WOOD BASS]). The indicator of the Left Voice selector will light while the [SPLIT] button is pressed, then only the Right Voice selector and [SPLIT] button indicators will remain lit. • [EFFECT] in the Split Mode Depending upon the conditions, one effect type will take priority over the other. Depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F4 (see page 30) you can change the depth value for each voice as you like. Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button — see page 19) will be applied to the Right Voice only. NOTE • [REVERB] in the Split Mode The reverb type assigned to the Right Voice will take priority over the other. (If the reverb is set to OFF, the Left Voice’s reverb type will be in affect.) Reverb depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [-/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button — see page 18) will be applied to the Right Voice only. SPLIT The split point is initially set at the F#2 key by default. You can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the [SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the LED display while the [SPLIT] button is held). The split point can also be set via the Function mode (see below). Example: A-1 b=1 C 2 A-1 Bb-1 Setting the Split Point ......................................................................................... C2 F~2 F#2 • “b” is indicated with a lower “_”. • “#” is indicated with an upper “~”. Other Split Mode Functions ......................................................................... The Clavinova Function mode provides access to a number of other split-mode functions, listed below. See the corresponding pages for details. • • • • • • • • Split Point ...................................................... Split Balance ................................................. Right Voice Octave Shift ................................ Left Voice Octave Shift .................................. Right Voice Effect Depth ................................ Left Voice Effect Depth .................................. Damper Range .............................................. Reset ............................................................. 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 17 Reverb The [REVERB] button selects a number of digital reverb effects that you can use for extra depth and expressive power. To select a reverb type press the [REVERB] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time the [REVERB] button is pressed). No reverb is produced when all indicators are off. ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB OFF No reverb effect is selected when no REVERB indicator is lit. ROOM This setting add a continuous reverb effect to the sound that is similar to the type of acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room. HALL 1 For a “bigger” reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall. HALL 2 For a really spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall. STAGE A simulation of the type of reverb produced in a stage environment. NOTE • The default reverb type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. • Even if the REVERB effect is OFF, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the CLP-950 GRAND PIANO 1 voice is selected. Adjusting Reverb Depth ......................................................................... –/NO +/YES ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE REVERB TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG 18 CLP-950/930 Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20 (the current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [REVERB] button is held). A setting of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum reverb depth. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously while holding the [REVERB] button to recall the default setting for the current voice (default depth settings are different for each voice). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Effect The [EFFECT] button allows you to select one of the effects that can give your sound greater depth and animation. To select an effect type press the [EFFECT] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time the [EFFECT] button is pressed). No effect is produced when all indicators are off. CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT OFF No effect is selected when no EFFECT indicator is lit. CHORUS Shimmering, broadening effect PHASER Adds depth to the sound. TREMOLO Tremolo effect DELAY Echo effect NOTE –/NO +/YES CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY EFFECT TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG • The default effect type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. Adjusting Effect Depth ............................................................................. Effect depth can be individually adjusted for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20 (the current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [EFFECT] button is held). A setting of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum effect depth. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously while holding the [EFFECT] button to recall the default setting for the current voice (the default depth settings are different for each voice). Brilliance (CLP-950) This control can be used to change the tonality or “timbre” of the sound output. The control range is from MELLOW to BRIGHT. MELLOW BRIGHT For a brighter or “sharper” tone, slide the control towards the BRIGHT position. For a “rounder” more mellow tone, slide the control towards the MELLOW position. BRILLIANCE NOTE • When the BRILLIANCE is set to BRIGHT, the overall sound will be slightly louder. If the MASTER VOLUME is set at a high level the sound may become distorted. If so, lower the MASTER VOLUME level. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 19 The Pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Damper (Right) Pedal ................................................................................ Soft pedal Damper pedal Sostenuto pedal The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. When the GRAND PIANO 1 voice is selected on the CLP-950, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. NOTE • On the CLP-950 the depth of the effect produced by the “Sustain Samples” can be adjusted via the “Pedal Functions” (page 32) in the function mode. • If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the main unit (page 58: CLP-930, page 50: CLP-950). Sostenuto (Center) Pedal ...................................................................... If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the pedal is held (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” NOTE • Organ, string and choir voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed. Soft (Left) Pedal ............................................................................................... The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes which are already playing when it is pressed. The left pedal can also be assigned to song start/stop operation via the “Left Pedal Mode” described on pages 31 (CLP-930) and 32 (CLP950). 20 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Touch Sensitivity Four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity — HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT or FIXED — can be selected to match different playing styles and preferences. To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time the [TOUCH] button is pressed). HARD MEDIUM SOFT HARD TOUCH The HARD setting requires the keys to be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness. MEDIUM The MEDIUM setting produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. This is the initial factory default setting. SOFT The SOFT setting allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure. FIXED (no indicator lit) All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard is played. When the FIXED type is selected, the volume of notes played in the FIXED mode can be set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while the [TOUCH] button is held (the current volume level appears on the display). The volume range is from 1 through 127. The default setting is 64. NOTE • This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard. • The touch sensitivity type and volume set in the FIXED mode will become the common setting for all voices. However, the touch sensitivity settings may have little or no effect with certain voices which are not normally responsive to keyboard dynamics (Refer to the “Voice Descriptions” on page 41). Transposition The Clavinova’s TRANSPOSE function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of 12 semitones (i.e. a maximum of one octave up or down). “Transposing” the pitch of the Clavinova keyboard facilitates playing in difficult key signatures, and you can easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instrumentalist. –/NO ON TRANSPOSE +/YES Use the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button while holding the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose down or up as required. The transposition range is from “–12” (down one octave) through “0” (normal pitch) to “12” (up one octave). The amount of transposition appears on the LED display while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose setting is “0”. TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG NOTE • The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting other than “0” is selected. • Notes below and above the A-1 … C7 range of the Clavinova sound one octave higher and lower, respectively. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 21 Tuning Tuning makes it possible to adjust the pitch of the Clavinova over a 427.0 Hz … 453.0 Hz (corresponding to the A3 note’s Hz) range in approximately 0.2 Hertz intervals. Pitch control is useful for tuning the Clavinova to match other instruments or recorded music. A -1 B -1 C3 B3 Tuning Up ............................................................................................................... Z To tune up (raise pitch), hold the A-1 and B-1 keys simultaneously. X Press any key between C3 and B3. Each time a key in this range is –/NO pressed the pitch is increased by approximately 0.2 Hz. The [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons can also be used to tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz increments. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall standard tuning (A3 = 440 Hz). +/YES C Release the A-1 and B-1 keys. Tuning Down ....................................................................................................... A# -1 A -1 C3 B3 Z To tune down (lower pitch), hold the A-1 and A#-1 keys simultaneously. X Press any key between C3 and B3. Each time a key in this range is –/NO pressed the pitch is decreased by approximately 0.2 Hz. The [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons can also be used to tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz increments. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall standard tuning (A3 = 440 Hz). +/YES C Release the A-1 and A#-1 keys. A# -1 A -1 B -1 C3 B3 To Restore Standard Pitch ................................................................... Z To restore the default pitch (A3 = 440 Hz), hold the A-1, A#-1 and B-1 keys simultaneously. X Press any key between C3 and B3. (Pressing once will restore the keyboard to standard pitch, regardless of the amount of pitch adjustment.) C Release the A-1, A#-1 and B-1 keys. In terms of “Hertz”, the overall tuning range is from 427.0 Hz to 453.0 Hz. The current tuning setting is shown on the LED display while the tuning is being adjusted. Tenths of a Hertz are indicated on the LED display by the appearance and position of one or two dots, as in the following example: Display 440 4.40 44.0 440. 4.40. NOTE 22 CLP-950/930 Value 440.0 440.2 440.4 440.6 440.8 • An alternative tuning method is available in the Function mode — page 28. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Metronome & Tempo Control The Clavinova built-in metronome is a convenient feature for practice, and it can also provide a solid rhythmic guide when recording using the User Song Recorder feature, described in the next section. The Metronome START/ STOP TEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG The metronome sound is alternately turned on and off by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. When on, the beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. METRONOME Beat indicator START/ STOP TEMPO/FUNCTION –/NO +/YES METRONOME TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG Metronome Time Signature ................................................................. The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. You can set the beat to 0, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (the current setting appears on the LED display while the METRONOME [START/STOP] button is held). Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously while holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button to recall the default setting “0” (no accent). Metronome Volume Function ............................................................ The volume of the metronome sound can be adjusted via the Metronome Volume function in the Function mode—page 32. Tempo Control TEMPO/FUNCTION TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the recorder is described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280 beats per minute by using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons. The selected tempo will appear on the LED display while in the normal play mode and while the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons are being used to adjust the tempo in the recording/playback mode. The default tempo (120 or the recorded song tempo when the recorder contains data and the playback track indicator is lit) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [t] and [s] buttons. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 23 Using the User Song Recorder The ability to record and play back what you’ve played on the Clavinova keyboard can be an effective practice aid. You can, for example, record just the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Or, since you can record up to two tracks separately, you could record the left- and right-hand parts separately, or record both parts of a duet and hear how they sound when played back. The user song recorder actually records the following data: ■ Entire Song ● Tempo ● Time signature (beat) ● Reverb type (including OFF) ● Effect type ■ Individual Tracks ● Notes played ● Voice selection ● Dual mode voices ● Split mode voices (CLP-950) ● Damper pedal ● Soft pedal ● Sostenuto pedal (not recorded as an initial setting) ● Effect depth ● Reverb depth ● Dual balance (F3) ● Dual detune (F3) ● Dual octave shift (F3) ● Split balance (F4: CLP-950) ● Split octave shift (F4: CLP-950) Recording Make All Necessary Initial Settings ........................................... CLP-950 GRAND GRAND E. PIANO E. PIANO HARPSI- VIBRA- CHURCH JAZ PIANO 1 PIANO 2 1 2 CHORD PHONE ORGAN ORG Before actually beginning to record, select the voice you want to record with (or voices if you will be using the dual or split mode). You might also want to set the volume and tempo controls. VOICE Engage the Record Ready Mode .................................................. ESET ONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC Press the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode (recording does not actually start yet). The record ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button a second time. • The record ready mode cannot be engaged while the demo/preset song mode is engaged. SONG Select the Record Track .......................................................................... ESET ONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP SONG REC When the record mode is engaged in the previous step, the lastrecorded track will automatically be selected for recording and its indicator — i.e. the TRACK [1] or [2] button indicator — will glow red. If you want to record on a different track, press the appropriate track button so that its indicator glows red. • The track button indicators of tracks which contain previously recorded data will glow green (unless the track is turned off as described below). The previously-recorded data on the non-record track will normally be played back as you record, so you can play along with a previously-recorded track. If you don’t want to hear the previously recorded track as you record (when you want to record a song different from what you recorded on the previous track etc.,), press the playback track button before pressing the [REC] button (step 1, above) so that its indicator goes out. TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG • Recording on a track which already contains data will erase all previous data on that track. • When the record mode is engaged the amount of memory available for recording will be shown on the LED display in approximate kilobytes (starting at “50”), and the rightmost dot on the LED display will flash at the current METRONOME tempo setting. 24 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Using the User Song Recorder Start Recording ................................................................................................ Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The current measure number will appear on the display while recording. ESET ONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC SONG • The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop recording via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on pages 31 (CLP-930) and 32 (CLP950). • If the metronome was on when you started recording, you’ll be able to keep time with the metronome while recording, but the metronome sound will not be recorded. • You can record up to a maximum of about 10,000 notes on the Clavinova, depending on pedal usage and other factors. The record track indicator will begin to flash when recorder memory is almost full. If the memory becomes full during recording, “ FUL” will appear on the display and recording will stop automatically. (All recorded data up to that point will be retained.) Stop Recording ................................................................................................ ESET ONG TRACK 1 SONG Press either the [REC] or SONG [START/STOP] button to stop recording. The indicator of the recorded track will glow green to indicate that it now contains data. Changing the Initial Settings ............................................................. ESET ONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC SONG The initial voice, tempo, reverb type, reverb depth, and effect settings made in step 1 of the recording procedure are actually recorded by the Clavinova. These initial settings can be changed after the recording is finished by pressing the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode, pressing the appropriate track button, making the required changes, and then pressing the [REC] button again to exit from the record ready mode and register the changes. If you do this, be careful not to press the SONG [START/STOP] button or a key on the keyboard, either of which will start recording and erase all previous recorded data on the selected track. It is possible to cancel the operation even after changes have been made: change tracks and then press the [REC] button to exit from the record mode (this also cancels data for the entire song). • The following data for initial settings cannot be changed: “Dual balance (F3)”, “Dual detune (F3)”, “Dual octave shift (F3)”, “Split balance (F4:CLP950)” or “Split octave shift (F4:CLP-950)”. Erasing a Single Track .............................................................................. ESET ONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP SONG REC All data can be erased from either of the recorder’s tracks by engaging the record mode, selecting the track you want to erase, and then pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button twice without recording any data. Press twice. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 25 Using the User Song Recorder Playback ESET ONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP REC SONG To play back what you’ve recorded, first make sure that the green track indicators of the tracks you want to play are lit. If not, press the corresponding track button(s) so that they are lit. Then press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback starts from the beginning of the recorded data, and will stop automatically at the end of the recorded data. You can also stop playback at any time by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. To mute a track so that it doesn’t play back, press the corresponding track button so that its indicator goes out (press again to turn the track back on). The current measure number appears on the display during playback. • It is possible to play along on the keyboard during playback. In this case, the playback voice and the voice you play on the keyboard are not the same. The playback voice is the voice that was set when the data was recorded. The voice you play on the keyboard is the voice that is selected on the panel. • The playback volume and tempo can be adjusted by using the [MASTER VOLUME] control and [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons (press both [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons simultaneously to recall the default tempo). • All user song recorder data will be retained in memory for about one week after the power is turned off. If you want to keep your recorded data for longer periods, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week. It is also possible to store it to an external MIDI storage device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 by using the Bulk Data Dump function described on page 35. • The track indicators will not light automatically when the power is turned on even if the user song recorder contains data. It is therefore necessary to press the track buttons so that the corresponding green indicators light before starting recorder playback. It is also a good idea to press the track buttons to check if the tracks contain data before recording. If the green indicator lights when the corresponding track button is pressed, that track contains data which will be erased and replaced by the newly-recorded data. • If the metronome is being used during playback, the metronome will automatically stop when playback is stopped. • During recorder playback, the volume of a track which is turned off will always be “0” (i.e. the “Preset Song Part Cancel Volume” function — page 32 — only affects preset song playback. • The playback data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. • Playback cannot be started when the demo/preset song mode is engaged. • Playback cannot be started when the recorder contains no data, or when both track buttons are off. • If the REVERB type is changed via the panel controls during playback, both the playback and keyboard reverb effects will be changed. • If the EFFECT type is changed via the panel controls during playback, the playback effect may be switched off in some cases. Synchro Start ............................................................................................................................ ESET ONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 START/ STOP SONG TEMPO/FUNCTION/SONG REC When the Synchro Start function is engaged, recorder playback will begin automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard. To engage the Synchro Start function press the SONG [START/STOP] button while holding a track button which is ON. The rightmost dot on the display will flash at the current tempo. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Syncro Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. If you hold a track button which is OFF while pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button, that track will be turned ON and the Synchro Start mode will be engaged. Left Pedal Start/Stop ......................................................................................................... The left pedal can be assigned to start and stop recorder playback via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on pages 31 (CLP-930) and 32 (CLP-950). This is convenient for starting playback of the recorded part anytime after you have started playing. 26 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Function Mode The [FUNCTION] button provides access to a range of functions that give the Clavinova extraordinary versatility. The functions are categorized in groups as follows: CLP-930 CLP-950 F1 F2 F3 – F4 – F5 F6 F7 F8 ON START/ STOP F1 F2 F3 F4 – F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 TEMPO/FUNCTION Tuning ............................................................. Scale ............................................................... Dual Mode Functions .................................... Split Mode Functions .................................... Left Pedal Mode ............................................. Pedal Functions ............................................. Metronome Volume ........................................ Preset Song Part Cancel Volume .................. MIDI Functions ............................................... Backup Functions .......................................... 28 28 29 30 31 32 32 32 33 36 To Select a Function … ........................................................................... Z Press the [FUNCTION] button so that its indicator lights. FUNCTION ON FUNCTION METRONOME START/ STOP TEMPO/FUNCTION METRONOME ● Operation Example Press [+/YES] (sub-mode) NOTE • Functions cannot be selected during demo/preset song playback or when the user song recorder is in operation. X Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired function: F1 through F8 on the CLP-930; F1 through F9 on the CLP-950. C In the case of the Scale (F2), Dual Mode (F3), Split Mode (F4: CLP-950), Pedal Functions (F5: CLP-950), MIDI (F7: CLP-930, F8: CLP-950), and Backup (F8: CLP-930, F9: CLP-950) functions, you will have to press the [+/YES] button once to enter the respective sub-mode after the function has been selected, and then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons again to select the desired sub-function. NOTE Use [TEMPO/ FUNCTION t, s] • The Dual or Split (CLP-950) mode must be engaged before the F3 and F4 functions can be selected, respectively. If the corresponding mode is not engaged, “F3.-” or “F4.-” will appear on the display and the corresponding sub-mode will not be available. • The Dual mode can be engaged while in the Function mode, but the Function mode must be exited before the Split mode (CLP-950) can be engaged. Press [–/NO] or [+/YES] once V Set the function as required by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] Use [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons (see the individual function descriptions, below). NOTE • After selecting the function, the current setting will be displayed when the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button is pressed for the first time. B Press the [FUNCTION] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the function mode. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 27 The Function Mode F1 Tuning In addition to the tuning method described on page 22, overall tuning can also be accomplished via the F1 function. After selecting “F1”, use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower or raise the pitch in approximately 0.2 Hz increments (the first time the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button is pressed simply switches to the tuning value display without actually changing the tuning). The overall tuning range is from 427.0 Hz to 453.0 Hz (corresponding to the A3 note’s Hz). Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default value “440 Hz”. Tenths of a Hertz are indicated on the LED display by the appearance and position of one or two dots, as in the following example: Display 440 4.40 44.0 440. 4.40. Value 440.0 440.2 440.4 440.6 440.8 F2 Scale After selecting “F2.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale function sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired scale function, as listed below. F2.1: Scale .......................................................................................................................................................... In addition to the standard Equal Temperament tuning, the Clavinova includes 6 classic tunings that you can select and use to play music of the corresponding period, or experiment with in a more modern context. The tunings are: 1: Equal Temperament 2: Pure Major 3: Pure Minor 4: Pythagorean 5: Mean Tone 6: Werckmeister 7: Kirnberger Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the number of the desired tuning. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default settings (Equal Temperament tuning). F2.2: Base Note ............................................................................................................................................. Unlike Equal Temperament tuning, these classic tunings must be tuned to a specific key. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the key you want the previously selected tuning to be based. The selected key will appear on the display, followed by a low bar if flat (e.g. “A_”) or a high bar if sharp (e.g. “F~”). Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default settings “C”. NOTE 28 CLP-950/930 • The base note setting is effective for tunings other than the Equal Temperament tuning. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Function Mode F3 Dual Mode Functions After selecting “F3.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the dual-mode function submode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired dual mode function, as listed below. If the Dual mode is not engaged “F3.-” will appear instead of “F3.Y” and the Dual mode functions cannot be selected. If this happens engage the Dual mode and proceed. ■ SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the dual-mode functions (F3) by pressing the [FUNCTION] button while holding the two dual-mode voice selectors. NOTE • Dual mode function settings are set individually for each voice combination. F3.1: Dual Balance ..................................................................................................................................... The volume levels of the two voices combined in the dual mode can be adjusted as required by using this function. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to adjust the balance as required. The balance range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “10” produces equal balance between the two dual-mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of the 2nd Voice in relation to the 1st Voice, and settings above “10” increase the volume of the 1st Voice in relation to the 2nd Voice (“1st” and “2nd” is explained on page 16). Press the [–/NO] and [+/ YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination). You can set one voice as the main voice, and another voice as a softer, mixed voice. F3.2: Dual Detune ....................................................................................................................................... This function makes it possible to detune the 1st and 2nd dual-mode Voices to create a thicker sound. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the amount of detuning as required. The detune range is from –10 through 10. A setting of “0” sets both voices to the same pitch. “+” values raise the pitch of the 1st voice while lowering the pitch of the 2nd voice, and “-” values raise the pitch of the 2nd voice while lowering the pitch of the 1st voice. (“1st” and “2nd” is explained on page 16). Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination). NOTE • The maximum amount of pitch variation increases toward the lower key range (±60 cents at the A-1 key), and decreases toward the higher key range (± 5 cents at the C7 key). 100 cents = 1 semitone. F3.3: 1st Voice Octave Shift ............................................................................................................. F3.4: 2nd Voice Octave Shift ........................................................................................................... Depending on which voices you combine using the dual mode, the combination may sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an octave. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the octave of the 1st or 2nd Voice as required (“1st” and “2nd” is explained on page 16). The available settings are “0” for normal pitch, “–1” to shift the pitch down one octave, and “1” to shift the pitch up one octave. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination). ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 29 The Function Mode F3.5: 1st Voice Effect Depth ............................................................................................................. F3.6: 2nd Voice Effect Depth ........................................................................................................... These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for the 1st and 2nd dual-mode Voices (“1st” and “2nd” is explained on page 16). Use the [–/NO] and [+/ YES] buttons to set the effect depth for the corresponding voice as required. The depth range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum effect depth. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination). NOTE • The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the EFFECT is ON. The Function mode must be exited before EFFECT can be turned ON. F3.7: Reset .......................................................................................................................................................... This function resets all dual-mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. “End” will appear on the display when all functions have been reset. F4 CLP-950 Split Mode Functions After selecting “F4.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the split-mode function submode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired split mode function, as listed below. If the Split mode is not engaged “F4.-” will appear instead of “F4.Y” and the Split mode functions cannot be selected. Also note that you must exit from the Function mode before the Split mode can be engaged. ■ SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the split-mode functions (F4) by pressing the [FUNCTION] button while holding the [SPLIT] button. NOTE • Split mode function settings are set individually for each voice combination. F4.1: Split Point ............................................................................................................................................. In addition to the split point setting method described on page 17, the split point can be set via this function. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the split point as required, or simply press the appropriate key on the keyboard: from “A-1” to “C7”. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “F#2”. F4.2: Split Balance ..................................................................................................................................... The volume levels of the two voices combined in the split mode can be adjusted as required by using this function. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to adjust the balance as required. The balance range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “10” produces equal balance between the two split-mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of the Left Voice in relation to the Right Voice, and settings above “10” increase the volume of the Right Voice in relation to the Left Voice. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination). 30 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Function Mode F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift ....................................................................................................... F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift ........................................................................................................... Depending on which voices you combine using the split mode, the combination may sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an octave. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the octave of the Left or Right Voice as required. The available settings are “0” for normal pitch, “–1” to shift the pitch down one octave, and “1” to shift the pitch up one octave. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination). Set according to the pitch extent for the song you want to play. F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth ...................................................................................................... F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth ........................................................................................................... These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for the Left and Right split-mode Voices. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the effect depth for the corresponding voice as required. The depth range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum effect depth. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (different for each voice combination). NOTE • The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the EFFECT is ON. The Function mode must be exited before EFFECT can be turned ON. F4.7: Damper Range ................................................................................................................................ The Damper Range function determines whether the damper pedal affects the Right Voice, the Left Voice, or both the Left and Right Voices in the split mode. Use the [–/NO] and [+/ YES] buttons to select “2” for the Left Voice, “1” for the Right Voice, or “ALL” for both voices. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “ALL”. F4.8: Reset .......................................................................................................................................................... This function resets all split-mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. “End” will appear on the display when all functions have been reset. F4 CLP-930 Left Pedal Mode This function sets the left pedal for normal soft-pedal operation or for song start/stop operation. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the desired left-pedal mode. “1” is the normal soft-pedal mode, and “2” is the start/stop mode. When the start/stop mode is selected, the left pedal functions in the same way as the panel SONG [START/STOP] button. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “1”. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 31 The Function Mode F5 CLP-950 Pedal Functions After selecting “F5.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the pedal functions sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired pedal functions, as listed below. F5.1: Left Pedal Mode ............................................................................................................................. This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal for normal soft pedal operation, or for song start/stop operation. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the desired leftpedal mode. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “1”. 1: Soft The left pedal functions as the soft pedal. 2: Start/Stop The left pedal functions in the same manner as the SONG [START/STOP] button. F5.2: Sustain Sample Depth ............................................................................................................ The CLP-950 GRAND PIANO 1 voice features special “Sustain Samples” which recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed. This function lets you adjust the depth of this effect. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the effect depth as required. The effect depth range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “0” produces no effect, while a setting of “20” produces maximum effect depth. Press the [–/ NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “12”. F5 CLP-930 Metronome Volume F6 CLP-950 Metronome Volume ■ SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the metronome functions by pressing the [FUNCTION] button while holding the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. The volume of the metronome sound can be changed. After selecting “F5” or “F6”, use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the metronome volume as required. The volume range is from 1 through 20. A setting of “1” produces minimum sound, while a setting of “20” produces maximum metronome volume. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “10”. F6 CLP-930 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume F7 CLP-950 Preset Song Part Cancel Volume This function sets the volume at which a “canceled” part is played during preset song playback (see page 15 for information on the “part-cancel” function). Use the [–/NO] and [+/ YES] buttons to set the volume as required. The volume range is from 0 through 20. A setting of “0” produces no sound, while a setting of “20” produces maximum volume. Press the [–/ NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “5”. Adjust the part volume to a comfortable level to use the “canceled” part as a guide to play along with. Set to “0” if you don’t want to hear the part. 32 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Function Mode F7 CLP-930 MIDI Functions F8 CLP-950 MIDI Functions ● A Brief Introduction to MIDI MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a worldstandard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible MIDI Cable musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and MIDI OUT MIDI IN control one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of DOU-10 MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments. For example, most Clavinova MIDI keyboards (including the Clavinova, of course) transmit note and velocity (touch response) information via the MIDI OUT connector whenever a note is played on the keyboard. If the MIDI OUT connector is connected to the MIDI IN connector of a second keyboard (synthesizer, etc.) or a tone generator (essentially a synthesizer with no keyboard), the second keyboard or tone generator will respond precisely to notes played on the original transmitting keyboard. The result is that you can effectively play two instruments at once, providing thick multi-instrument sounds. This same type of musical information transfer is used for MIDI sequence recording. A sequence recorder can be used to “record” Data Being Recorded MIDI data received from a Clavinova, for example. When the Playback Data recorded data is played back, the Clavinova automatically “plays” MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN the recorded performance in precise detail. DOU-10 The examples given above really only scratch the surface. MIDI can do much, much more. The Clavinova MIDI functions allow it to Clavinova be used in fairly sophisticated MIDI systems. After selecting “F7.Y” or “F8.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI function submode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired MIDI function, as listed below. NOTE • The bottom-panel HOST SELECT switch must be set to “MIDI” in order to use the MIDI connectors. When you use the TO HOST connector, set the HOST SELECT switch to the appropriate position for the type of computer you are using (see page 37). In this situation, all MIDI settings described below will have affect on the MIDI signal in and out of the TO HOST connector. • Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. F7.1/F8.1: MIDI Transmit Channel Selection .............................................................................. F7.2/F8.2: MIDI Receive Channel Selection ................................................................................ The MIDI system allows transmission and reception of MIDI data on 16 different channels. Multiple channels have Tone Generator DOU-10 been implemented to allow selective (Set to receive on MIDI channel 2) Clavinova control of certain instruments or devices (Set to receive on MIDI channel 1) connected in series. For example, a single MIDI sequence recorder could be used to “play” two different instruments or tone generators. One of the instruments or tone generators could be set to receive only on channel 1, while the other is set to receive on channel 2. In this situation the first instrument or tone generator will respond only to channel-1 information transmitted by the sequence recorder, while the second instrument or tone generator will respond only to channel-2 information. This allows the sequence recorder to “play” two completely different parts on the receiving instruments or tone generators. MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI THRU ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 33 The Function Mode In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. A “Multi-timbre” receive mode is also available, which allows simultaneous reception of different parts on all 16 MIDI channels, allowing the Clavinova to play multi-channel song data received from a music computer or sequencer. There’s also a “1-2” mode which allows simultaneous reception on channels 1 and 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the desired transmit or receive channel. The transmit channel parameter can also be turned “OFF” if you don’t want the Clavinova to transmit any MIDI data. To select the multi-timbre receive mode, set the receive channel to “ALL”. Select “1-2” for multi-timbre reception on channels 1 and 2 only. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting: transmit = “1”; receive = “ALL”. NOTE • In the dual mode first voice data is transmitted on its set channel, and in the split mode right voice data is transmitted on its set channel. In the dual mode second voice data is transmitted on the next greater channel number of the set channel, and in the split mode left voice data is transmitted on the next greater channel number of the set channel. In either mode, no data is transmitted if the transmit channel is set to “OFF”. • Demo/preset song data and recorder playback data are not transmitted via MIDI. • No MIDI reception occurs when the demo/preset song mode is engaged. • Program change and other like channel messages received will not affect the Clavinova’s panel settings or what is being played on the keyboard. F7.3/F8.3: Local Control ON/OFF ........................................................................................................... “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the AUX IN OUT PUT MIDI Clavinova keyboard controls its internal tone generator, MIDI OUT R L L R IN allowing the internal voices to be played directly from DOU-10 the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control On” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by Clavinova its own keyboard. Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the Clavinova keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. When using the DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit with the Clavinova, for example, Local Control should be turned OFF when recording using the DOU-10 voices only, and ON when recording the Clavinova voices while listening to playback of the DOU-10 voices. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn local control “On” or “OFF”. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “On”. F7.4/F8.4: Program Change ON/OFF ................................................................................................. Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly numbered voice to be selected on the corresponding channel (the keyboard voice does not change). The Clavinova will normally also send a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspondingly numbered voice or program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers. This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so that voices can be selected on the Clavinova without affecting the external MIDI device. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn program change transmission and reception “On” or “OFF”. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “On”. NOTE 34 CLP-950/930 • For information on program change numbers for each of the Clavinova’s voices, refer to page 44 in the MIDI Data Format section. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ The Function Mode F7.5/F8.5: Control Change ON/OFF ......................................................................................... Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI control change data received from an external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the voice on the corresponding channel to be affected by pedal and other “control” settings received from the controlling device (the keyboard voice is not affected). The Clavinova also transmits MIDI control change information when one of its pedals or other appropriate controls are operated. This function makes it possible to cancel control change data reception and transmission so that, for example, the Clavinova pedals and other controls can be operated without affecting an external MIDI device. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn control change transmission and reception “On” or “OFF”. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “On”. NOTE • For information on control changes that can be used with the Clavinova, refer to the MIDI Data Format on page 43. F7.6/F8.6: MIDI Transmit Transpose ........................................................................................ This function allows the MIDI note data transmitted by the Clavinova to be transposed up or down in semitone increments by up to plus or minus 12 semitones. The pitch of the Clavinova itself is not affected. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the desired amount of MIDI transmit transposition. The range is from “–12” (down one octave) through “0” (no transposition) to “12” (up one octave). Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting “0”. F7.7/F8.7: Panel/Status Transmit ................................................................................................ This function causes all the current Clavinova panel settings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal. This is particularly useful if you will be recording performances to a MIDI sequence recorder such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 which will be used to control the Clavinova on playback. By transmitting the Clavinova panel settings and recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to the actual performance data, the Clavinova will be automatically restored to the same settings when the performance is played back. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status data. “End” will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. NOTE • See page 44 for list of the “Panel Data Contents” transmitted by this function. • Panel setting data that is transmitted to an external device can only be reloaded on a model of the same type. Panel setting data can also be directly transferred to or from instruments of the same model type. F7.8/F8.8: Bulk Data Dump ............................................................................................................... This function is used to transmit all data stored in the Recorder memory to a MIDI data storage device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3, other sequence recorders, or MIDI compatible computers. Press the [+/YES] button to begin bulk transmission. “End” will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. NOTE • User song recorder data that is transmitted to an external device can only be reloaded on a model of the same type. Recorder data can also be directly transferred to or from instruments of the same model type. • The reload operation cannot be executed when the demo/preset song mode or user song recorder is in operation, or when the Function mode is engaged. • No MIDI note/panel data transmission or data reception occurs during a bulk data dump transmit operation. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 35 The Function Mode F8 CLP-930 Backup Functions F9 CLP-950 Backup Functions After selecting “F8.Y” or “F9.Y”, press the [+/YES] button to engage the backup function sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION t, s] buttons to select the desired backup function, as listed below. • The backup settings themselves, and the contents of the user song recorder memory, are always backed up. NOTE • Even if the Backup is turned on, factory presets can be recalled at any time (see page 40). The factory setting list is found on page 42. Even if backup is turned on via one of the functions described below, the data will only be retained in memory for about 1 week if the power is not turned on during this time. If the backup period is exceeded, all settings will be reset to their default values. If you want to retain the backup settings for longer periods, be sure to turn the power switch on for a few minutes at least once a week. F8.1/F9.1: Voice .............................................................................................................................................. Turns backup of the voice functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”. The default backup mode is “OFF”. • • • • • • • • Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split: CLP-950) Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each voice combination) Split (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Functions for each voice combination : CLP-950) Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume) Metronome (Beat, Volume) Preset Song Part Cancel Volume F8.2/F9.2: MIDI ................................................................................................................................................ Turns backup of the MIDI functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”. The default backup mode is “OFF”. • Channel (Transmit, Receive) • Program Change ON/OFF • MIDI Transmit Transpose • Local ON/OFF • Control Change ON/OFF F8.3/F9.3: Tuning .......................................................................................................................................... Turns backup of the tuning functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”. The default backup mode is “OFF”. • Transpose • Tuning • Scale (including base note) F8.4/F9.4: Pedal ............................................................................................................................................. Turns backup of the pedal functions listed below on or off. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to turn backup “On” or “OFF”. The default backup mode is “OFF”. • Left Pedal Mode 36 CLP-950/930 • Sustain Sample Depth (CLP-950) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Connecting to a Personal Computer Although the Clavinova can be connected to a personal computer via the MIDI IN/OUT connectors and a MIDI interface, the TO HOST connector and HOST SELECT switch allow direct connection to Apple Macintosh or IBM-PC/AT personal computers for sequencing and other music applications without the need for a separate MIDI interface. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Home Page: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ • When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn the power to both the Clavinova and the computer OFF before connecting the cable and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After connecting the cable and making the appropriate HOST SELECT switch setting, turn the power to the computer on first, then turn on the Clavinova. NOTE • When not using the [TO HOST] terminal of the Clavinova, make sure the cable is disconnected from the [TO HOST] terminal. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly. • “ HS(” will appear in the display if the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is not properly connected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active. In this case, turn the power off on both the Clavinova and the computer, and check the cable connection and the position of the HOST SELECT switch. Once the connection and HOST SELECT switch position is verified, turn the power of the computer on first, then the Clavinova, to check if the MIDI driver and MIDI application function properly. • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “Mac”, “PC-1”, or “PC-2, no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. To use the MIDI connectors for connection via a standard MIDI interface, set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI”. Connecting to an Apple Macintosh Series Computer ................................................................................................................ Apple Macintosh Series Computer Set to the “Mac” position. Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT CLP-930 Connect the TO HOST connector of the Clavinova to the modem or printer port on your Macintosh, depending on which port your MIDI software is using for MIDI data communication, using a standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch to the “Mac” position. You may also have to make other MIDI interface settings on the computer side, depending on the type of software you use (refer to your software owner’s manual). In any case the clock speed should be set to 1 MHz. ● “Mac” Cable Connections MINI DIN 8-PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 (HSK i) 1 (HSK 0) 5 (RxD-) 4 GND 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP i) 6 (TxD+) MINI DIN 8-PIN • 8-pin system peripheral cable. • Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 37 Connecting to a Personal Computer Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ............ IBM-PC/AT Series Computer Set to the “PC-2” position. Mac PC-1 TO HOST Connect the TO HOST connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port on your IBM computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cross cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2” position. Refer to your software owner’s manual for information on any settings you might have to make on the computer side. MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT ● “PC-2” Cable Connections CLP-930 MINI DIN 8-PIN 1 2 3 4 8 5 8 (CTS) 7 (RST) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) D-SUB 9-PIN 3 (TxD) • 8-pin mini DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cable. • Data transfer rate: 38,400 bps. NOTE • If your system doesn’t work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and if it requires a 31,250 bps. data transfer rate, set the HOST SELECT switch to “PC-1”. • When using the TO HOST terminal to connect to a personal computer using Windows, a Yamaha MIDI driver must be installed in the personal computer. The Yamaha MIDI driver can be obtained at Yamaha’s home page on the World Wide Web, <http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/xg/>. ● Connector Pin Numbers MINI DIN 8-PIN 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 D-SUB 9-PIN 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 38 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Connecting to a Personal Computer Using a USB Interface (such as the Yamaha UX256) Connect the USB interface (Yamaha UX256 or equivalent) to your computer using a USB cable. Install the driver software supplied with the interface (or other appropriate driver software) on your computer according to the supplied instructions. Connect your instrument to the USB interface using either a standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable or MIDI cables. Refer to the manual supplied with your USB interface for details. ● Connecting the USB Interface and Instrument via a Serial Cable or PC-1 HOST SELECT Mac HOST SELECT Standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable USB cable Mini-DIN 8-pin UX256 or equivalent Clavinova Computer ● Connecting the USB Interface and Instrument via MIDI Cables MIDI OUT IN MIDI HOST SELECT MIDI cables USB cable UX256 or equivalent Clavinova Computer ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 39 Factory Preset Recall POWER All dual mode, split mode, reverb, effect, touch sensitivity, tuning settings, and the settings affected by the Backup Functions can be restored to their original factory preset values by holding the C7 key (rightmost key on the keyboard) while turning the [POWER] switch ON. This also erases all recorder data, and sets all Backup on/off settings (F8: CLP-930, F9: CLP-950) to “OFF”. NOTE • The factory setting list is found on page 42. Troubleshooting If you encounter what appears to be a malfunction, please check the following points before assuming that your Clavinova is faulty. 1. No Sound When the Power is Turned ON Is the AC plug properly connected to the Clavinova and an AC wall outlet? Check the AC connection carefully. Is the CLP-950 speaker cord properly plugged into the connector? (page 50) Is the MASTER VOLUME control turned up to a reasonable listening level? Also make sure that a pair of headphones is not plugged into the PHONES jack, and that the Local Control (page 34) is ON. 2. The Damper Pedal Doesn’t Work If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the main unit (page 58: CLP-930, page 50: CLP-950). 3. The Clavinova Reproduces Radio or TV Sound This can occur if there is a high-power transmitter in your vicinity. Contact your Yamaha dealer. 4. Intermittent Static Noise This is usually due to turning ON or OFF a household appliance or other electronic equipment which is fed by the same AC mains line as your Clavinova. 5. Interference Appears On Radio or TV Sets Located Near the Clavinova The Clavinova contains digital circuitry which can generate radio-frequency noise. The solution is to move the Clavinova further away from the affected equipment, or vice versa. 6. Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s speakers. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. 7. Distorted Sound When the Clavinova is Connected to An External Amplifier/Speaker System If the Clavinova is connected to a stereo system or instrument amplifier and the sound is distorted, reduce the volume of the external equipment to a level at which the distortion ceases. ● If “Scn” appears on the display an internal malfunction has occurred. In this case, contact your Yamaha dealer. Options & Expander Modules ● Options ● Expander Modules BC-8 Bench A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova. HPE-160 Stereo Headphones High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads. 40 CLP-950/930 DOU-10 Disk Orchestra Unit A range of MIDI recording and playback functions, plus Yamaha DOC software, Disklavier PianoSoft™, and General MIDI/Standard MIDI File disk playback capability. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ Voice Descriptions/Beschreibung der Stimmen/ Description des voix/Descripciones de las voces Voice CLP- CLP- Stereo/ Touch Dynamic 950 930 Mono Response Sampling* GRAND PIANO – O Stereo O X GRAND PIANO 1 O – Stereo O O GRAND PIANO 2 O – Stereo O X E.PIANO 1 O O Stereo O O E.PIANO 2 O O Mono O O HARPSICHORD O O Stereo X X VIBRAPHONE O O Stereo O O CHURCH ORGAN O O Stereo X X JAZZ ORGAN O – Mono X X STRINGS O O Stereo O X CHOIR O O Stereo O X WOOD BASS O – Mono O X E.BASS O – Mono O X Voice Descriptions Newly-recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. Neu aufgezeichnete Samples eines echten Konzertflügels. Perfekt für klassische Kompositionen sowie viele andere Musikrichtungen, für die ein akustischer Klavierklang wichtig ist. Nouveaux échantillons enregistrés d’un vrai piano de concert. Parfaits pour les compositions classiques comme pour tout autre style nécessitant un piano acoustique. Muestras nuevas grabadas en un piano de cola para conciertos. Son perfectas para composiciones clásicas así como para otros estilos que requieren piano acústico. Newly-recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also includes dynamic sampling, sustain samples, and key-off samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. Neu aufgezeichnete Samples eines echten Konzertflügels. Mit “Dynamic Sampling”, “Sustain Samples” und “Key-off Samples” für einen außergewöhnlich realistischen Konzertflügelklang. Perfekt für klassische Kompositionen sowie viele andere Musikrichtungen, für die ein akustischer Klavierklang wichtig ist. Échantillons nouvellement enregistrés à partir d’un vrai piano à queue de concert. Inclus également des échantillons dynamique, sustain et hors touche destinés à produire une sonorité acoustique réaliste d’un vrai piano à queue de concert. Parfaits pour les compositions classiques comme pour tout autre style nécessitant un piano acoustique. Muestras nuevas grabadas en un piano de cola para conciertos. Incluyen también muestras dinámicas, muestras de sostenido, y muestras de soltado de cuerdas para ofrecer un sondo de piano de cola acústico muy realista. Son perfectas para composiciones clásicas así como para otros estilos que requieren piano acústico. A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal for rock and popular genres. Ein heller, weiträumiger Pianosound, der sich ideal für Rock und andere populäre Musikgenres eignet. Sonorité de piano brillante et expansive idéale pour les genres de musiques rock et populaire. Sonido de piano claro y con expansión que es ideal para música rock y popular. An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. Ein elektronischer Pianosound, der durch FM-Synthese erzeugt wird. Äußerst “musikalische” Ansprache mit anschlagstärkeabhängiger Klangfärbung. Sonorité de piano électronique créée par synthèse FM. Réponse extrêmement “musicale” avec un timbre variant en proportion de la dynamique du clavier. Sonido de piano electrónico creado con síntesis de FM. Tiene una respuesta muy “musical” con variación del timbre de acuerdo con la dinámica del teclado. The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. Der Sound eines elektrischen Pianos mit metallischen “Hammeranschlag-Spitzen”. Bei leichtem Anschlagen erhält man einen weichen Klang, mit zunehmender Anschlagstärke einen aggressiveren Sound. Sonorité de piano électrique se servant de “pointes” métalliques de frappe de marteau. Sonorité atténuée lorsque les touches sont frappées légèrement et sonorité agressive lorsque le jeu est plus dur. Sonido de piano eléctrico que usa los tonos metálicos de golpe de martillo. Es un tono suave cuando se toca con delicadeza, y es un tono agresivo cuando se toca con fuerza. The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. Cembalo, das maßgebliche Instrument der Barockmusik. Da die Saiten bei diesem Instrument angezupft werden, spricht diese Stimme nicht auf Anschlagdynamik an. Beim Freigeben der Tasten ist jedoch ein zusätzlicher charakteristischer Klang zu hören. L’instrument définitif pour la musique baroque. Étant donné que la harpe se sert de cordes pincer, il n’existe aucune réponse de touche. Cependant, cette sonorité supplémentaire caractéristique est obtenue lorsque les touches sont relâchées. El instrumento perfecto para música barroca. Puesto que el clavicordio emplea cuerdas de punteado, no hay respuesta a la pulsación. Sin embargo, hay un sonido característico adicional al soltar las teclas. Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. Das Vibraphon wird mit relativ weichen Schlegeln gespielt. Je härter der Anschlag, um so metallischer wirkt der Klang. Vibraphone joué avec des maillets relativement souples. La sonorité devient plus métallique au fur et à mesure que le jeu des touches est plus dur. Vibráfono tocado con mazos relativamente blandos. El tono pasa a ser más metálico a medida que se toca con más fuerza. A soft pipe-organ type voice that is ideal for hymn accompaniment and other styles. Ein sanfter pfeifenorgelähnlicher Klang, der sich ideal für Hymnenbegleitung und andere Musikstile eignet. Voix de type orgue à tuyaux et sonorité enveloppée convenant parfaitement pour l’accompagnement d’un hymne ou d’autres styles. Una voz del tipo de órgano de tubos que es ideal para acompañamientos de himnos y otros estilos. The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. Der Sound einer “Tonewheel”-Elektroorgel. In Jazz- und Rockidiomen weit verbreitet. Sonorité d’une molette de courbure du son de type orgue électrique. Souvent entendue dans les dialectes de jazz et de rock. Sonido de un órgano eléctrico del tipo “rueda fónica”. Se oye normalmente en estilos de jazz y rock. A large string ensemble. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode. Ein großes Streicherensemble. Probieren Sie diese Stimme einmal kombiniert mit Piano im Dualmodus aus. Grand ensemble à cordes. Essayez d’associer cette voix avec le piano en mode DUAL. Un conjunto de instrumentos de cuerdas grande. Pruebe combinando esta voz con la de piano en el modo DUAL. A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. Ein satter, reichhaltiger Klang. Perfekt zur Erzeugung voller Harmonien in Stücken mit langsamem Tempo. Une ample et spacieuse voix de chœur. Convient parfaitement pour créer de riches harmoniques dans les passages lents. Una voz de coros grande y espaciosa. Es perfecta para crear ricas armonías de piezas lentas. An upright bass played fingerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin music. Ein mit den Fingern gespielter Kontrabaß. Ideal für Jazz und lateinamerikanische Musik. Sorte de doigté de basse droite. Convient parfaitement pour la musique de jazz et la musique latine. Contrabajo tocado con punteado. Es ideal para jazz y música latina. Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. E-Baß für eine Reihe von Musikrichtungen wie Jazz, Rock, Pop usw. Basse électrique destinée à une vaste gamme de styles de musique de jazz, rock, populaire et autres. Bajo eléctrico para una amplia variedad de estilos de música, jazz, rock, popular, y otros. * Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic piano. * “Dynamic Sampling” hält mehrere “Velocity-switched Samples” bereit, die anschlagdynamisch gesteuert wiedergegeben werden und so die bei unterschiedlicher Anschlagstärke erzeugten klanglichen Variationen eines akustischen Instruments reproduzieren. * L’échantillonnage dynamique procure des échantillons multiples commutés permettant de simuler avec une précision remarquable le timbre d’un piano acoustique. * El muestreo dinámico proporciona múltiples muestras de velocidad cambiada para simular con precisión la respuesta del timbre de un piano acústico. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 41 Demo Song List/Verzeichnis der Demo-Songs/ Liste des morceaux de démonstration/Lista de canciones de demostración Voice Demo Tune Titles Voice Name GRAND PIANO GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO1 E.PIANO2 HARPSICHORD VIBRAPHONE CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR WOOD BASS E.BASS • • • • CLP-930 CLP-950 O – – O – O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O – O – O Title Valse op.64-1 “Petit chien” Nocturne op.9-2 Piano Sonate op.13 “Pathétique” 2nd mov. Clair de lune Scherzo-valsa (Pièces Pittoresques) Le Coucou Study in A minor Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2 Trolltog (Lyriske Småstykker No.5) Brandenburgisches Konzert No.3 Kantate Nr.140 L’Eléphant In The Kings Hall Composer F.F.Chopin F.F.Chopin L.v.Beethoven C.A.Debussy E.Chabrier L-C.Daquin Georges Pheiffer G.F.Händel E.H.Grieg J.S.Bach J.S.Bach Saint-Saëns E.H.Grieg Some of the demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts from the original compositions. Bei manchen der oben aufgeführten Demo-Stücke handelt es sich um kurze, umgestaltete Auszüge aus den Originalkompositionen. Certains des morceaux de démonstration cités ci-dessus sont de courts extraits arrangés des compositions originales. Algunas de las piezas de demostración arriba mencionadas son pasajes cortos arreglados de las composiciones originales. Factory Setting List/Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen/ Liste des réglages/Lista de ajustes de fábrica Voice Dual Mode Split Mode Split Mode Left Voice Reverb Type Reverb Depth Effect Type Effect Depth Touch Sensitivity Volume in the FIXED Mode Metronome Metronome Time Signature Tempo Transpose CLP-950 CLP-930 GRAND PIANO 1 OFF OFF BASS Preset for each voice Preset for each voice Preset for each voice Preset for each voice MEDIUM 64 OFF 0 (no accent) 120 0 GRAND PIANO OFF — — Preset for each voice Preset for each voice Preset for each voice Preset for each voice MEDIUM 64 OFF 0 (no accent) 120 0 Backup Group CLP-950 CLP-930 F9.1 F8.1 — F9.1 — F9.3 — F8.1 — F8.3 “—”: Not memorized Function CLP-950 CLP-930 F1 F2.1 F2.2 F3.1 F3.2 F3.3, F3.4 F3.5, F.3.6 F4.1 F4.2 F4.3, F4.4 F4.5, F4.6 F4.7 F5.1 F5.2 F6 F7 F8.1 F8.2 F8.3 F8.4 F8.5 F8.6 F9 F1 F2.1 F2.2 F3.1 F3.2 F3.3, F3.4 F3.5, F.3.6 — — — — — F4 — F5 F6 F7.1 F7.2 F7.3 F7.4 F7.5 F7.6 F8 42 CLP-950/930 Function Default Tuning Scale Base Note Dual Balance Dual Detune Dual Octave Shift Dual Effect Depth Split Point Split Balance Split Octave Shift Split Effect Depth Damper Range Left Pedal Mode Sustain Sample Depth Metronome Volume Preset Song Part Cancel Volume MIDI Transmit Channel MIDI Receive Channel Local Control Program Change Send & Receive Control Change Send & Receive MIDI Transmit Transpose Backup A3=440Hz 1 (Equal Temperament) C Preset for each voice combination Preset for each voice combination Preset for each voice combination Preset for each voice combination F#2 Preset for each voice combination Preset for each voice combination Preset for each voice combination ALL 1 (soft pedal) 12 10 5 1 ALL ON ON ON 0 All OFF Backup Group CLP-950 CLP-930 F9.3 F8.3 F9.1 F8.1 F9.4 F8.4 F9.1 F8.1 F9.2 F8.2 Always backed up Always backed up ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/ Format des données MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI If you’re already very familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music hardware with computergenerated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control the Clavinova. Falls Sie bereits mit MIDI vertraut sind oder einen Computer zur Erzeugung von MIDI-Steuermeldungen für die Instrumente verwenden, können Sie sich zur Steuerung des Clavinovas nach den im folgenden Abschnitt aufgeführten Spezifikationen richten. 1. NOTE ON/OFF Data format: [9nH] -> [kk] -> [vv] 9nH = Note ON/OFF event (n = channel number) kk = Note number (Transmit: 09H ~ 78H = A-2 ~ C8 / Receive: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8)* vv = Velocity (Key ON = 01H ~ 7FH, Key OFF = 00H) Data format: [8nH] -> [kk] -> [vv] (reception only) 8nH = Note OFF event (n = channel number) kk = Note number: 00H ~ 7FH = C-2 ~ G8 vv = Velocity * If received value exceeds the supported range for the selected voice, the note is adjusted by the necessary number of octaves. 2. CONTROL CHANGE Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv] BnH = Control change (n = channel number) cc = Control number vv = Data Range (1) Bank Select ccH 00H 20H (2) Main Volume (reception only) Parameter Volume MSB Data Range (vvH) 00H...7FH (3) Expression ccH 0BH Parameter Expression MSB Parameter Damper MSB Parameter Sostenuto Data Range (vvH) 00H...7FH Parameter Soft Pedal Parameter Effect1 Depth Data Range (vvH) 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on Data Range (vvH) 00H...7FH Adjusts the reverb send level. (8) Effect4 Depth ( Variation Effect Send Level ) ccH 5EH Parameter Effect4 Depth ccH 78H Parameter All Sound Off Data Range (vvH) 00H Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages. (2) Reset All Controllers ccH 79H Parameter Data Range (vvH) Reset All Controllers 00H Resets controllers as follows. Controller Expression Damper Pedal Sostenuto Soft Pedal ccH 7AH Value 127 (max) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (off) Parameter Local Control Data Range (vvH) 00H (off), 7FH (on) (4) All Notes Off ccH 7BH Parameter All Notes Off Data Range (vvH) 00H Switches OFF all the notes that are currently ON on the specified channel. Any notes being held by the damper or sostenuto pedal will continue to sound until the pedal is released. ccH 7CH Parameter Omni Off Data Range (vvH) 00H (6) Omni On (reception only) ccH 7DH Parameter Omni On Data Range (vvH) 00H (7) Mono (reception only) ccH 7EH (7) Effect1 Depth ( Reverb Send Level ) ccH 5BH (1) All Sound Off Same processing as for All Notes Off. Data Range (vvH) 00H-3FH:off, 40H-7FH:on (6) Soft Pedal ccH 43H BnH = Control event (n = channel number) cc = Control number vv = Data Range Same processing as for All Notes Off. (5) Sostenuto ccH 42H 3 MODE MESSAGES Data format: [BnH] -> [cc] -> [vv] (5) Omni Off (reception only) Data Range (vvH) 00H...7FH (4) Damper ccH 40H SI usted está ya familiarizado con MIDI, o si emplea una computadora para controlar sus aparatos musicales con mensajes MIDI generados por computadora, los datos proporcionados en esta sección le ayudarán a controlar la Clavinova. (3) Local Control (reception only) Parameter Data Range (vvH) Bank Select MSB 00H:Normal Bank Select LSB 00H...7FH Bank selection processing does not occur until receipt of next Program Change message. ccH 07H Si vous êtes très familier avec l’interface MIDI ou si vous utilisez un ordinateur pour commander votre matériel de musique au moyen de messages MIDI générés par ordinateur, les données suivantes vous seront utiles et vous aideront à commander le Clavinova. Data Range (vvH) 00H...7FH Parameter Mono Data Range (vvH) 00H Same processing as for All Sound Off. (8) Poly (reception only) ccH 7FH Parameter Poly Data Range (vvH) 00H Same processing as for All Sound Off. • When control change reception is turned OFF in the Function mode, control change data will not be transmitted or received except for Bank Select and Mode messages. • Local on/off, OMNI on/off are not transmitted. (The appropriate note off number is supplied with “All Note Off” transmission). • When a voice bank MSB/LSB is received, the number is stored in the internal buffer regardless of the received order, then the stored value is used to select the appropriate voice when a program change message is received. • The Multi-timbre and Poly modes are always active. No change occurs when OMNI ON, OMNI OFF, MONO, or POLY mode messages are received. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 43 MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format des données MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI 4. PROGRAM CHANGE Data format: [CnH] -> [ppH] • Panel Data Contents CnH = Program event (n = channel number) ppH = Program change number P.C.#=Program Change number GRAND PIANO 1* GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD VIBRAPHONE CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR WOOD BASS E.BASS MSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CLP-950 LSB P.C.# 112 0 112 1 112 5 112 4 112 6 112 11 112 19 112 16 112 48 112 52 112 32 112 33 MSB 0 CLP-930 LSB P.C.# 112 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 112 112 112 5 4 6 11 19 0 0 112 112 48 52 * Indicated as GRAND PIANO on the CLP-930 • When program change reception is turned OFF in the Function mode, no program change data is transmitted or received. Also, Bank MSB/LSB is not transmitted or received. 5. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES [rrH] F8H: Timing clock FAH: Start FCH: Stop FEH: Active sensing Data Transmission Reception F8H Transmitted every 96 clocks Received as 96-clock tempo timing when MIDI clock is set to External FAH Recorder start Recorder start Not received when the MIDI clock is set to Internal. FCH FEH Recorder stop Transmitted every 200 milliseconds Recorder stop Not received when the MIDI clock is set to Internal. If a signal is not received via MIDI for more than 400 milliseconds, the same processing will take place for All Sound Off, All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers as when those signals are received. • Caution: If an error occurs during MIDI reception, the Damper, Sostenuto, and Soft effects for all channels are turned off and an All Note Off occurs. 6. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Yamaha MIDI Format) Panel Data Transmit Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [7CH] -> ... -> [F7H] F0H, 43H, 0nH, 7CH (n: channel number) 00H, 2AH (data length) 43H, 4CH, 20H, 20H (CL) 43H, 4CH, 50H, 27H, 30H, 30H (CLP-950/930) 30H, 30H (version x, y) [PANEL DATA] [CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-(43H+4CH+20H+......+Data end) F7H 44 CLP-950/930 (1) 1'st Voice (2) Dual On/Off (3) Dual Voice (4) Dual Balance (5) Dual Detune (6) Dual Voice1 Octave (7) Dual Voice2 Octave (8) Dual Voice1 Effect Depth (9) Dual Voice2 Effect Depth (10) Split On/Off (11) Split Voice (12) Split Point (13) Split Balance (14) Split Voice1 Octave (15) Split Voice2 Octave (16) Split Voice1 Effect Depth (17) Split Voice2 Effect Depth (18) Split Dumper Mode (19) Reverb Type 1 (20) Reverb Type 2 (21) Reverb Depth1 (22) Reverb Depth2 (23) Effect Type 1 (24) Effect Type 2 (25) Effect Depth (26) Touch Sensitivity (27) Fixed Data (28) Left Pedal Function (29) Absolute tempo low byte (30) Absolute tempo high byte CLP-950 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O CLP-930 O O O O O O O O O X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O • “X” indicates no affect. • Panel data send requests cannot be received. 7. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Universal System Exclusive) (1) Universal Realtime Message Data format: [F0H] -> [7FH] -> [XnH] -> [04H] -> [01H] -> [ll H] -> [mmH] -> [F7H] MIDI Master Volume • Simultaneously changes the volume of all channels. • When a MIDI master volume message is received, the volume only has affect on the MIDI receive channel, not the panel master volume. F0H 7FH 7FH 04H 01H ll H mmH F7H or F0H 7FH XnH 04H 01H ll H mmH F7H = Exclusive status = Universal Realtime = ID of target device = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume = Volume LSB = Volume MSB = End of Exclusive = Exclusive status = Universal Realtime = When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received. X = don’t care = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume = Volume LSB = Volume MSB = End of Exclusive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ (2) Universal Non-Realtime Message (GM 0n) General MIDI Mode On Data format: [F0H] -> [7EH] -> [XnH] -> [09H] -> [01H] -> [F7H] F0H 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H = Exclusive status = Universal Non-Realtime = ID of target device = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On = End of Exclusive or F0H 7EH XnH 09H 01H F7H = Exclusive status = Universal Non-Realtime = When received, n=0~F. X = don’t care = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On = End of Exclusive 9. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Clavinova MIDI Format) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [xxH] -> [nnH] -> [F7H] F0H 43H 73H xxH = Exclusive status = Yamaha ID = Clavinova ID = Product ID (CLP-950/930 common ID: 67H or CLP common ID: 01H) nnH = Substatus nn Control 02H Internal MIDI clock 03H External MIDI clock 06H Bulk Data (the bulk data follows 06H) F7H = End of Exclusive * When nn=02H or 03H, Clavinova common ID (01H) is recognized as well as 50H. BULK DUMP FORMAT F0H, 43H, 73H xxH When the General MIDI mode ON message is received, the MIDI system will be reset to its default settings. This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent. =Product ID (CLP-950: 6BH, CLP-930: 6AH) 06H =Bulk ID 05H =Sequence data 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH, 0nH =Data length [BULK DATA] = [CHECK SUM (1byte)] = 0-sum (BULK DATA) F7H = End of Exclusive 8. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (XG Standard) (1) XG Native Parameter Change Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [4CH] -> [hhH] -> [mmH] -> [ll H] -> [ddH] -> [F7H] F0H 43H 1nH 4CH hhH mmH ll H ddH | F7H = Exclusive status = YAMAHA ID = When received, n=0~F. When transmitted, n=0. = Model ID of XG = Address High = Address Mid = Address Low = Data = End of Exclusive Data size must match parameter size. When the XG System On message is received, the MIDI system will be reset to its default settings. The message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent. 10. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Special Control) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [73H] -> [xxH] -> [11H] -> [0nH] -> [ccH] -> [vvH] -> [F7H] F0H 43H 73H 67H 11H 0nH cc vv F7H = Exclusive status = Yamaha ID = Clavinova ID = CLP-950/930 common ID = Clavinova special control = Control MIDI change (n=channel number) = Control number = Value = End of Exclusive Control Split Point 0n Always 00H Metronome Always 00H Damper Level ch: 00H-0FH Channel Detune ch: 00H-0FH Voice Reserve ch: 00H-0FH (2) XG Native Bulk Data (reception only) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [0nH] -> [4CH] -> [aaH] -> [bbH] -> [hhH] -> [mmH] -> [ll H] -> [ddH] ->...-> [ccH] -> [F7H] F0H 43H 0nH 4CH aaH bbH hhH mmH ll H ddH | | ccH F7H Exclusive status YAMAHA ID When received, n=0~F. When transmitted, n=0. Model ID of XG ByteCount ByteCount Address High Address Mid Address Low Data | | Check sum End of Exclusive • Receipt of the XG SYSTEM ON message causes reinitialization of relevant parameters and Control Change values. Allow sufficient time for processing to execute (about 50 msec) before sending the Clavinova another message. • XG Native Parameter Change message may contain two or four bytes of parameter data (depending on the parameter size). • For information about the Address and Byte Count values, refer to Table 1 below. Note that the table’s Total Size value gives the size of a bulk block. Only the top address of the block (00H, 00H, 00H) is valid as a bulk data address. ccH 14H vvH 14H : Split Key Number (CLP-950) 1BH 00H : off 01H : – 02H : 2/4 03H : 3/4 04H : 4/4 05H : 5/4 06H : 6/4 7FH : No accent 3DH (Sets the Damper Level for each channel: CLP-950) 00H-7FH 43H (Sets the Detune value for each channel) 00H-7FH 45H 00H : Reserve off 7FH : on* * When Volume, Expression is received for Reserve On, they will be effective from the next Key On. Reserve Off is normal. 11. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES (Others) Data format: [F0H] -> [43H] -> [1nH] -> [27H] -> [30H] -> [00H] -> [00H] -> [mmH] -> [ll H] -> [ccH] -> [F7H] Master Tuning (XG and last message priority) simultaneously changes the pitch of all channels. F0H 43H 1nH 27H 30H 00H 00H mmH ll H ccH F7H = Exclusive Status = Yamaha ID = Transmission from n=CLP is always 0. 0-F is received. = Model ID of TG100 = Sub ID = = = Master Tune MSB = Master Tune LSB = don’t care (under 7FH) = End of Exclusive ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 45 MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format des données MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI <Table 1> MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM ) Address (H) 00 00 00 01 02 03 Size (H) 4 Data (H) Parameter 020C - 05F4(*1) MASTER TUNE 04 05 06 7E 7F TOTAL SIZE 1 1 1 00 - 7F — 34 - 4C(*2) 00 00 MASTER VOLUME — TRANSPOSE XG SYSTEM ON RESET ALL PARAMETERS Description -50 - +50[cent] 1st bit 3 - 0 → bit 15 - 12 2nd bit 3 - 0 → bit 11 - 8 3rd bit 3 - 0 → bit 7 - 4 4th bit 3 - 0 → bit 3 - 0 0 - 127 Default value (H) 00 04 00 00 400 -12 - +12[semitones] 00=XG sytem ON 00=ON (receive only) 40 7F 07 *1: Values lower than 020CH select -50 cents. Values higher than 05F4H select +50 cents. *2: Values from 28H through 33H are interpreted as -12 through -1. Values from 4DH through 58H are interpreted as +1 through +12. <Table 2> MIDI Parameter Change table ( EFFECT 1) Refer to the “Effect MIDI Map” for a complete list of Reverb, Chorus and Variation type numbers. Address (H) 02 01 00 Size (H) 2 Data (H) 00-7F 00-7F Parameter REVERB TYPE MSB REVERB TYPE LSB Description Refer to Effect MIDI Map 00 : basic type Default value (H) 01(=HALL1) 00 02 01 40 2 00-7F 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB VARIATION TYPE LSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 00 : basic type 00(=Effect off) 00 Description 0 - 127 Default value (H) 7F • “VARIATION” refers to the EFFECT on the panel. <Table 3> MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI PART ) Address (H) 08 nn 11 Size (H) 1 Data (H) 00 - 7F Parameter DRY LEVEL nn = Part Number ● Effect MIDI Map REVERB ROOM HALL 1 HALL 2 STAGE Sound board MSB 02H 01H 01H 03H 03H LSB 10H 10H 11H 10H 12H (CLP-950) MSB 42H 48H 42H 05H LSB 10H 10H 12H 10H EFFECT CHORUS PHASER TREMOLO DELAY 46 CLP-950/930 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ YAMAHA [Clavinova] Date: 1 March, 2000 MIDI Implementation Chart Model: CLP-950/930 Function Transmitted Basic Default Channel Changed Version: 1.0 Recognized Remarks 1 1~16 1 1~16 Default Messages Altered 3 X ***************** 1 X X : True voice 9~120 ***************** 0~127 21~108 Velocity Note on Note off O 9nH, v=1~127 X 9nH, v=0 O v=1~127 X After Touch key’s Ch’s X X X X X X 0, 32 07 11 64 66 67 91 94 O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Bank Select Volume Expression Damper Sostenuto Soft pedal Reverb Depth Effect Depth 120 121 X X O O All sounds off Reset All Controllers Program Change : True # O ***************** O System Exclusive O O System : Song Position : Song Select Common : Tune X X X X X X System : Clock Real Time : Commands O O O O Aux X O O X O O (123~127) O X Mode Note Number Pitch Bender *1 Poly Mode only Control Change : Local ON/OFF : All Notes Off Messages : Active Sense : Reset Notes : *1 = Recieve Mode is always multi timbre and Poly mode. Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ O: Yes X: No CLP-950/930 47 Assembly Parts / Bauteile / Éléments à assembler / Partes del conjunto 6 x 25 mm round-head screws 6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm x4 1 x8 2 D 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm x4 3 E 6 x 16 mm flat-head screws 6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 mm 4 x 20 mm tapping screws 4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm Tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm x4 4 A B B C Pedal cord Pedalkabel Cordon de pédalier Cable de pedales ● Cord holders x 2 ● Kabelhalter x 2 ● Serre-câble x 2 ● Soportes de cable x 2 ● AC power cord ● Netzkabel ● Cordon d’alimentation ● Cable de alimentación de CA ● The music stand is packaged in cardboard, and included inside the box. Do not forget to remove it from the box. ● Der Notenständer ist in einer separaten Verpackung im Karton enthalten. Vergessen Sie beim Auspacken nicht, auch den Notenständer aus dem Karton zu nehmen. ● Le pupitre à partition est emballé dans du carton et se trouve dans la boîte. Ne pas oublier de le retirer la boîte. ● El atril está embalado con cartón y se encuentra dentro de la caja. No se olvide de sacarlo de la caja. CLP-950: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP-950: Zusammenbau und Aufstellung CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated above. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. VORSICHT • Achten Sie darauf, die Teile nicht zu verwechseln, und installieren Sie alle Teile in der richtigen Ausrichtung. Gehen Sie beim Zusammenbau bitte in der angegebenen Reihenfolge vor. • Die Montage sollte von mindestens zwei Personen vorgenommen werden. • Achten Sie darauf, die richtige Schraubengröße zu verwenden, wie es oben gezeigt ist. Die Verwendung der falschen Schrauben kann zu Schäden führen. • Achten Sie während der Montage darauf, bei jedem Arbeitsgang alle Schrauben festzuziehen. • Für die Demontage muß die angegebene Reihenfolge umgekehrt befolgt werden. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. Sie benötigen einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher (+). The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. Es werden die in der “Bauteile”-Zeichnung abgebildeten Teile verwendet. Folgen Sie beim Zusammenbau den Anweisungen, und wählen Sie die jeweils benötigten Teile. the side panels (B) to the pedal box Z Attach (C). Sie die Seitenwände (B) am PedalZ Befestigen kasten (C). Align the holes on the side of the pedal box (C) with those on the side panels (B), attach the pedal box to the side panels using the four 6 x 25 millimeter round-head screws 1 — two screws on each side. Make sure the pedals extend in the same direction as the feet. Bringen Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Seite des Pedalkastens (C) mit denen an den Seitenwänden (B) zur Deckung, und schrauben Sie den Pedalkasten mit den vier 6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben 1, jeweils zwei Schrauben links und rechts, an den Seitenwänden fest. Achten Sie dabei darauf, daß die Pedale in dieselbe Richtung weisen wie die vorspringenden Teile der Füße. X Attach the front panel (D). The front panel attaches to the front end of the pedal box and side panels. Fit the front panel into position. Align the small hole in each six brackets and attach the front panel using the six 4 x 12 millimeter round-head screws 2. 48 CLP-950/930 X Montieren Sie die Stirnwand (D). Die Stirnwand wird am vorderen Ende des Pedalkastens und der Seitenwände angebracht. Setzen Sie die Stirnwand an. Bringen Sie die kleinen Bohrungen der sechs Halterungen mit denen in der Stirnwand aus, und schrauben Sie die Stirnwand mit den sechs 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 fest. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 ● Remove the vinyl tie from the folded pedal cord. Do not remove the vinyl tie located next to the hole. ● Entfernen Sie den Kabelbinder vom zusammengelegten Pedalkabel. Der Kabelbinder neben der Durchführung darf nicht entfernt werden! ● Retirez l’attache en vinyle du cordon de pédale plié. Ne retirez pas l’attache en vinyle placée près de l’ouverture. ● Extraiga la abrazadera de plástico del cable del pedal plegado. No extraiga la abrazadera de plástico que está al lado del orificio. 2 B R D B B L C B 6 x 25 mm round-head screws 1 6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben 1 Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm 1 Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm 1 CLP-950: Assemblage du support de clavier • • • • • PRECAUTION Veiller à ne pas mélanger les pièces et à les installer dans le sens correct. Veuillez assembler l’instrument dans l’ordre indiqué ci-dessous. La présence de deux personnes minimum est nécessaire pour procéder au montage. Toujours utiliser des vis aux dimensions correctes, comme indiqué cidessus. I’utilisation de vis aux dimensions incorrectes pourrait en effet endommager l’instrument. Resserrer convenablement toutes les vis après le montage de chaque élément. Pour démonter le Clavinova, inverser l’ordre des indications données cidessous. Munissez-vous d’un tournevis Phillips (cruciforme). Les éléments qui sont représentés sur la figure intitulée “Éléments à assembler” seront utilisés. Veuillez vous conformer aux instructions d’assemblage et sélectionner les éléments nécessaires. Z Fixez les panneaux latéraux (B) au pédalier (C) Faites correspondre les trous visibles sur le flanc du pédalier (C) avec deux des panneaux latéraux (B), puis fixer le pédalier sur les panneaux latéraux à l’aide de quatre vis de fixation à tête ronde de 6 x 25 millimètres 1 - soit deux vis de chaque côté. Veillez à ce que les pédales soient dirigées dans le même sens que les supports inférieurs. X Fixez le panneau avant (D). Le panneau avant se fixe sur le bord avant du logement de pédalier et sur les panneaux latéraux. Montez le panneau avant dans la position voulue. Alignez les trous de faible diamètre percés dans chacune des platines de fixation puis fixer le panneau avant en utilisant les six vis de fixation à tete ronde de 4 x 12 millimètres 2. 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm 2 Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2 CLP-950: Conjunto del soporte del teclado CUIDADO • Observe cuidado para no confundir las piezas, y asegúrese de montar todas ellas en el sentido correcto. Proceda al montaje en el orden indicado a continuación. • El montaje deberá realizarse al menos por dos personas. • Procure utilizar los tornillos del tamaño adecuado, según se indica arriba. El empleo de tornillos inadecuados puede ocasionar daños en el instrumento. • Asegúrese de apretar bien todos los tornillos después de montar cada unidad. • Para desmontar las unidades, invierta la secuencia de montaje facilitada a continuación. Tenga preparado un destornillador de cabeza en cruz (+). Se usarán las partes mostradas en la ilustración de “Partes del conjunto”. Siga las instrucciones de montaje y seleccione las partes a medida que se requieran. los paneles laterales (B) en la caja de Z Acople pedales (C). Alinee los orificios del lado de la caja de pedales (C) con los de los paneles laterales (B), y acople la caja de pedales a los paneles laterales empleando los cuatro tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 milímetros 1 — dos tornillos en cada lado. Asegúrese de que el pedal se extiende en la misma dirección que la pata. X Monte el panel frontal (D). El panel frontal se coloca en el extremo frontal de la caja de pedales y los paneles laterales. Adapte el panel frontal en su posición. Alinee el orificio pequeño de cada una de las seis ménsulas y monte el panel frontal empleando los seis tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 milímetros 2. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 49 3 ● The bracket on the front has 2 holes. Insert the screws into the holes on the front panel side of the bracket. ● Die vorderen Winkelbleche haben zwei Schraubenbohrungen. Führen Sie die Schraube jeweils in die Bohrung an der Stirnwandseite ein. ● La partie avant de la ferrure comporte deux trous. Introduisez les vis de fixation dans les trois du côté du panneau avant de la ferrure. ●La ménsula de la parte frontal tiene 2 orificios. Inserte los tornillos en los orificios del lado del panel frontal de la ménsula. 10 cm 10 cm A ● Be sure to place your hands at least 10 centimeters from either end of the main unit when positioning it. ● Mindestens 10 cm innen unter die Tastatureinheit greifen. ● Placez bien vos mains à 10 cm au moins des extrémités du clavier, lors de sa mise en place. ● Asegúrese de colocar las manos por lo menos a 10 centímetros desde los extremos de la unidad principal cuando la sitúe. 6 x 16 mm flat-head screws 3 6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben 3 Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm 3 Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 mm 3 C Install the main unit (A). C Montieren Sie die Tastatureinheit (A). Place the main unit (A) on the side panels (B) with the screws on its bottom panel (toward the rear of the main unit) just behind the grooves in the brackets located at the top of the side panels. Then slide the main unit forward until it stops. WATCH YOUR FINGERS WHEN DOING THIS!! Align the holes on the bottom panel of the main unit with the holes in the brackets on the side panels (also center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides, as shown in the illustration), then use the four 6 x 16 millimeter flat-head screws 3 to attach the main unit. The four screws can be attached from the rear. Setzen Sie die Tastatureinheit (A) so auf den fertigen Ständer, daß die beiden Schrauben an ihrer Unterseite hinter den Winkelblechen mit Führungsschlitz an der Hinterseite des Ständers zu liegen kommen. Schieben Sie die Tastatureinheit dann bis zum Anschlag in die Schlitze. KLEMMEN SIE IHRE FINGER DABEI NICHT EIN!! Richten Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Unterseite der Tastatureinheit mit den Bohrungen der Winkelbleche aus (achten Sie auch darauf, daß sie mittig auf dem Ständer steht, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt), um die Tastatureinheit dann mit den vier 6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben 3 festzuschrauben. Die vier Schrauben können von der Rückseite her eingeführt werden. CAUTION • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the above illustration. • Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. V Connect the speaker cord. The speaker cord from the speaker box must be plugged into the corresponding connector in the main unit. The plug only goes in one way (the lug on the connector should face the rear of the main unit, as shown in the illustration), so don’t try to force it in the wrong way around. B Connect the pedal cord. The pedal cord from the pedal box must be plugged into the PEDAL connector located at the rear of the main unit’s underside. Once connected, attach the cord holders to the side panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. 50 CLP-950/930 VORSICHT • Halten Sie die Tastatureinheit nur wie in der obigen Abbildung! • Achten Sie darauf, daß Sie Ihre Finger nicht zwischen Tastatureinheit und den Seitenwänden bzw. der Rückwand einklemmen — die Tastatureinheit könnte dadurch zu Fall kommen! V Schließen Sie das Lautsprecherkabel an. Das vom Lautsprecher kommende Kabel wird an die entsprechende Buchse an der Tastatrureinheit angeschlossen. Der Kabelstecker paßt nur in einer Ausrichtung in die Buchse (mit der Führungsnase zur Rückseite des Instruments weisend, wie in der Abbildung verdeutlicht). Versuchen Sie nicht, den Stecker falsch herum mit Gewalt in die Buchse zu drücken! B Schließen Sie das Pedalkabel an. Das vom Pedalkasten kommende Pedalkabel wird an die PEDAL-Buchse hinten an der Unterseite der Tastatureinheit angeschlossen. Bringen Sie nach dem Anschluß die Kabelhalter an der Seitenwand an, um das Kabel dann in diese Halter zu klemmen. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 5 PEDAL PEDA L ● Before connecting the speaker cord, remove the vinyl tie attaching the speaker cord to the front panel. ● Entfernen Sie vor dem Anschluß des Lautsprecherkabels den Kabelbinder, mit dem das Kabel an der Stirnwand festgemacht ist. ● Avant de raccorder le cordon de haut-parleur, retirez l’attache en vinyle qui immobilise le cordon de haut-parleur sur le panneau avant. ● Antes de conectar el cable de altavoz, extraiga la abrazadera de plástico que fija el cable de altavoz al panel frontal. Cord holder Kabelhalter Serre-câble Soporte del cable C Installez le clavier (A) C Instale la unidad principal (A). Placez le clavier sur les panneaux latéraux (B), avec les vis de son panneau inférieur (situées vers l’arrière du clavier) placées immédiatement derrière les rainures des ferrures situées à la partie supérieure des panneaux latéraux (B), puis faites glisser le clavier vers l’avant jusqu’à ce qu’il vienne en butée. FAITES ATTENTION A VOS DOIGTS EN EXECUTANT CETTE OPERATION!! Alignez les trous du panneau inférieur du clavier sur les trous des ferrures des panneaux latéraux (centrez également le clavier de manière à avoir un jeu identique de chaque côté) utilisez ensuite quatre vis de fixation à tête plate de 6 x 16 millimètres 3 pour immobiliser le clavier. Les quatre vis peuvent être fixées par l’arrière. Coloque la unidad principal en los paneles laterales (B) con los tornillos de su panel inferior (hacia la parte posterior de la unidad principal) justo detrás de las ranuras de la ménsula ubicada en la parte superior de los paneles laterales (B), después deslice el teclado hacia adelante hasta que se pare. ¡TENGA CUIDADO CON SUS DEDOS MIENTRAS LO HACE! Alinee los orificios del panel inferior de la unidad principal con los orificios de las ménsulas de los paneles laterales (también centre la unidad principal para producir una holgura igual en los lados derecho e izquierdo, como se muestra en la ilustración), y emplee entonces los cuatro tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 milímetros 3 para montar la unidad principal. Los cuatro tornillos pueden colocarse desde detrás. PRECAUTION • Ne tenez pas le clavier d’une autre manière que celle indiquée sur l’illustration ci-dessus. • Attention car vous risquez de vous faire pincer les doigts entre le clavier et les panneaux arrière ou latéraux de sorte que vous devez veiller à ne pas faire tomber le clavier. V Raccordez le câble de haut-parleur Le câble de haut-parleur qui sort du logement de haut-parleur doit être raccordé au connecteur correspondant du clavier. La prise ne s’enclenche que d’une seule manière (la cosse du connecteur doit être orientée vers l’arrière du clavier, comme indiqué sur l’illustration), aussi, n’essayez pas de la faire entrer de force dans le mauvais sens. B Raccordez le câble du pédalier Le câble du pédalier qui sort du logement de pédalier doit être raccordé au connecteur PEDAL implanté à l’arrière du panneau de dessus de l’instrument. Une fois branché, fixez les attaches de câble sur le panneau latéral en procédant de la façon représentée sur la figure, puis emboîtez le câble dans les attaches. CUIDADO • No sostenga el teclado en ninguna posición que no sea la posición mostrada en la ilustración de arriba. • Podría pillarse los dedos ente la unidad principal y los paneles traseros o laterales, por lo que deberá tener mucho cuidado que no se caiga la unidad principal. V Conecte el cable de altavoz. El cable de altavoz procedente de la caja de altavoces debe enchufarse al conector correspondiente de la unidad principal. La clavija sólo entra en un sentido (la lengüeta del conector debe orientarse hacia atrás de la unidad principal, como se muestra en la ilustración), por lo que no deberá forzarla al revés. Una vez conectada, coloque los soportes de cable en el panel trasero como se muestra, y enganche el cable en los soportes. B Conecte el cable de los pedales. El cable de los pedales procedente de la caja de pedales debe enchufarse al conector PEDAL situado en la parte posterior del lado inferior de la unidad principal. Una vez se ha conectado, coloque los soportes de cable del panel lateral como se muestra, y sujete el cable en los soportes. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 51 6 7 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm 2 Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2 ● A voltage selector is provided in some areas. ● Spannungswähler (nur in bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten) ● Un sélecteur de tension est prévu pour certaines régions ● El selector de tensión está provisto para ciertos destinos. B E 220 240 110 127 4 x 20 mm tapping screws 4 4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 4 Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 4 Tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 4 N Voltage Selector N Den Spannungswähler einstellen. Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET. Bevor Sie nun das Netzkabel anschließen, müssen Sie den Spannungswähler (falls vorhanden) auf die örtliche Netzspannung einstellen. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungswähler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der richtige Spannungswert (110, 127, 220 oder 240) an der Pfeilmarkierung steht. Bei der Auslieferung werden alle Instrumente mit Spannungswähler auf “240” voreingestellt. Nachdem Sie den Spannungswähler auf den richtigen Spannungswert eingestellt haben, stecken Sie das Netzkabel in die AC INLET-Buchse. CAUTION • An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. • Eine falsche Spannungseinstellung kann das Clavinova schwer beschädigen und Funktionsstörungen zur Folge haben. M Attach the rear panel (E). With the rear panel slightly angled as shown in the illustration, lower it onto the feet’s protruding edge at the rear of the pedal box. At this time, run the AC power cord through the cutout on the rear panel. Then, secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets using two 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2. Finally, secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four 4 x 20 mm tapping screws 4. Move the instrument to the location where it will be used and connect the AC power cord to an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? ➔ Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➔ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? ➔ Tighten all screws. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? ➔ Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. ● After assembly is complete, it will be necessary to remove the keyboard string. This procedure is performed once only and the string will never have to be reattached again. For instructions on its removal, refer to the paper titled "REQUEST" that can be found on the keys underneath the key cover (see page 10). 52 CLP-950/930 VORSICHT M Montieren Sie die Rückwand (E). Setzen Sie die Rückwand leicht abgewinkelt, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, hinter dem Pedalkasten auf die hervorspringenden Teile der Füße auf. Verlegen Sie das Netzkabel dabei durch den Ausschnitt in der Rückwand. Schrauben Sie dann die Rückwand oben mit zwei 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 fest. Schrauben Sie die Rückwand abschließend noch mit vier 4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 4 an den Pedalkasten. Bringen Sie das Instrument an seinen Stellplatz, und schließen Sie das Netzkabel an eine Steckdose an. In manchen Gebieten wird ein Steckerdapter mitgeliefert, um den Anschluß an die evtl. unterschiedlich geformte Steckdose zu ermöglichen. ■ Wenn der Zusammenbau beendet ist, prüfen Sie bitte folgende Dinge: • Sind Teile übrig geblieben? ➔ Gehen Sie den Vorgang des Zusammenbaus noch einmal durch und korrigieren Sie eventuelle Fehler. • Befindet sich das Clavinova weit genug von Türen und anderen beweglichen Vorrichtungen entfernt? ➔ Bewegen Sie das Clavinova an einen entsprechend sicheren Ort. • Macht das Clavinova Klappergeräusche, wenn Sie es schütteln? ➔ Ziehen Sie alle Schrauben fest. • Sind Pedal-und Netzkabel richtig an den Buchsen angeschlossen? ➔ Prüfen Sie die Verbindung. • Wenn die Haupteinheit knarrt oder beim Spielen wackelt, betrachten Sie die Abbildungen und ziehen Sie alle Schrauben noch einmal nach. ● Nach dem Zusammenbau müssen Sie den Tastatur-Sicherungsdraht entfernen. Diese Arbeit wird nur einmal ausgeführt, und der Draht braucht später nicht wieder angebracht zu werden. Anweisungen hierzu entnehmen Sie bitte dem unter der Tastaturabdeckung auf den Tasten liegenden Hinweisblatt (siehe Seite 10). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CAUTION • When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold instrument by the lower surface in the front of the main unit and by the handles in the rear panel. NEVER the top portion or keyboard cover. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. VORSICHT • Fassen Sie zum Umstellen des Instruments nach dem Zusammenbau vorne unter die Unterseite der Tastatureinheit und hinten in die Griffmulden; heben Sie es NIEMALS am oberen Teil des Gehäuses oder am Tastaturdeckel. Bei Nichtbeachtung dieses Punkts kann das Instrument beschädigt und im Extremfall eine Verletzung hervorgerufen werden. PRECAUTION • Lorsque l’instrument doit être déplacé après avoir été assemblé, saisissez-le toujours par la surface inférieure de l’instrument proprement dit et par les poignées du panneau arrière. JAMAIS par sa partie supérieure ou par le protège-clavier. Une mauvaise manipulation peut provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. CUIDADO • Cuando mueva el instrumento después del montaje, sostenga siempre el instrumento por la superficie inferior de delante de la unidad principal y por las asas del panel posterior. NUNCA la parte superior de la cubierta del teclado. La manipulación indebida puede causar daños en el instrumento o personales. N Sélecteur de tension N Selector de tensión Avant de connecter le cordon d’alimentation, vérifiez le réglage du sélecteur de tension qui est prévu pour certaines régions. Pour régler le sélecteur sur 110 V, 127 V, 220 V ou 240 V, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le cadran du sélecteur afin de mettre l’indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d’usine. Après avoir choisi la tension appropriée, branchez le cordon d’alimentation secteur dans la prise AC INLET de l’instrument. Antes de conectar el cable de alimentación de CA, compruebe el ajuste del selector de tensión que se incorpora para ciertos destinos. Para ajustar el selector a 110V, 127V, 220V ó 240V de la red de alimentación, emplee un destornillador de cabeza recta “-” para girar el selector de modo que la tensión correcta de su zona aparezca al lado del indicador del panel. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Después de haber seleccionado la tensión correcta, enchufe el cable de alimentación de CA a la toma AC INLET. PRECAUTION • Vous risquez de sérieusement endommager le Clavinova ou de provoquer un fonctionnement anormal de l’instrument en ne choisissant pas correctement la tension d’alimentation. M Fixez le panneau arrière (E) En inclinant légèrement en angle le panneau arrière, comme mentionné sur l’illustration, abaissez-le sur le rebord des pieds, à l’arrière du pédalier. Faire passer à ce moment-là le cordon d’alimentation secteur dans l’échancrure aménagée dans le panneau arrière. Puis fixez le haut du panneau arrière sur les supports des panneaux latéraux à l’aide de deux vis à tête ronde 4 x 12 mm 2. Et finalement, fixez le bas du panneau arrière au pédalier avec quatre vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 4. Déplacez l’instrument jusqu’à l’emplacement où il est prévue de l’utiliser, puis raccorder le cordon d’alimentation secteur à une prise de sortie secteur. Un adaptateur de prise peut également être fourni dans certaines régions pour pouvoir brancher le cordon à la prise secteur murale. ■ Lorsque le montage est terminé, veuillez mener à bien les vérifications suivantes. • Reste-t-il des pièces non utilisées? ➔ Passer en revue la procédure de montage et corriger toute erreur éventuelle. • Le Clavinova est-il placé à l’écart des portes et de toute autre structure mobile? ➔ Déplacer le Clavinova vers un emplacement approprié. • Lorsque vous secouez quelque peu le Clavinova, entendez-vous un cliquetis? ➔ Serrer convenablement toutes les vis. • Les cordons des pédales et d’alimentation sont-ils bien enfoncés dans les prises? ➔ Vérifier toutes les connexions. • Si la partie principale de l’appareil craque ou est instable lorsque vous jouez sur le clavier, consulter les diagrammes de montage et resserrer toutes les vis. ● Dès que l’assemblage est complètement terminé, la corde de clavier doit être retirée. Ceci n’est exécuté qu’une seule fois et il ne sera plus nécessaire de fixer la corde à nouveau. En ce qui concerne les instructions pour retirer cette corde, veuillez vous référer à la page intitulée “REQUEST” qui est placée sur les touches du clavier sous le couvreclavier (voir page 10). CUIDADO • Un ajuste incorrecto de la tensión puede causar daños serios a la Clavinova o ser motivo de mal funcionamiento. M Monte el panel trasero (E). Con el panel trasero un poco inclinado en ángulo como se muestra en la ilustración, bájelo al borde saliente de las patas de la parte posterior de la caja de pedales. Entonces, pase el cable de alimentación de CA por el corte del panel posterior. Entonces, fije la parte superior del panel trasero a las ménsulas de panel lateral usando dos tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2. Finalmente, fije la parte inferior del panel trasero a la caja de pedales usando cuatro tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 4. Mueva el instrumento al lugar donde deba utilizarse y conecte el cable de alimentación de CA a una toma de corriente de CA de la pared. En algunas zonas puede suministrarse también un adaptador para adaptar la configuración de las patillas de los tomacorrientes de CA de su localidad. ■ Cuando haya concluido el montaje, compruebe los siguientes puntos: • ¿Ha quedado alguna pieza sin instalar? ➔ Revise el procedimiento de montaje y corrija cualquier error que se haya podido cometer. • ¿Está el Clavinova alejado del recorrido de puertas y muebles? ➔ Traslade el Clavinova a una posición adecuada. • ¿Suena algún ruido de holgura cuando se mueve el Clavinova? ➔ Apriete con firmeza todos los tornillos. • ¿Están perfectamente insertados los cables de pedal y alimentación en los conectores? ➔ Revise las conexiones. • Si la unidad principal cruje o presenta algún signo de inestabilidad cuando se toca el teclado, consulte los esquemas de montajee y vuelva a apretar todos los tornillos. ● Después de haber terminado el montaje, será necesario extraer la cuerda del teclado. Este procedimiento sólo se lleva a cabo una vez y la cuerda no se tendrá que volver a atar nunca más. Para las instrucciones sobre la extracción de la cuerda, consulte el documento titulado “RUEGO” que encontrará sobre las teclas debajo de la cubierta del teclado (vea la página 10). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 53 Assembly Parts / Bauteile / Éléments à assembler / Partes del conjunto A D D B C Bundled pedal cord inside Gebündeltes Pedalkabel Cordon de pédalier enroulé à l’intérieur Cable de pedales enrollado en el interior ● Cord holders x 2 ● Kabelhalter x 2 ● Serre-câble x 2 ● Soportes de cable x 2 ● AC power cord ● Netzkabel ● Cordon d’alimentation ● Cable de alimentación de CA CLP-930: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated above. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. the side panels (D) to the pedal box Z Attach (C). Before installing the pedal box, untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step V. Align the holes on the side of the pedal box (C) with those on the side panels (D), attach the pedal box to the side panels using the four 6 x 25 millimeter round-head screws 1 — two screws on each side. Make sure the pedals extend in the same direction as the feet. 54 CLP-950/930 6 x 25 mm round-head screws 6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm x4 1 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm x2 2 4 x 20 mm tapping screws 4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm Tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm x4 3 6 x 16 mm flat-head screws 6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 mm x4 4 ● The music stand is packaged in cardboard, and included inside the box. Do not forget to remove it from the box. ● Der Notenständer ist in einer separaten Verpackung im Karton enthalten. Vergessen Sie beim Auspacken nicht, auch den Notenständer aus dem Karton zu nehmen. ● Le pupitre à partition est emballé dans du carton et se trouve dans la boîte. Ne pas oublier de le retirer la boîte. ● El atril está embalado con cartón y se encuentra dentro de la caja. No se olvide de sacarlo de la caja. CLP-930: Zusammenbau und Aufstellung VORSICHT • Achten Sie darauf, die Teile nicht zu verwechseln, und installieren Sie alle Teile in der richtigen Ausrichtung. Gehen Sie beim Zusammenbau bitte in der angegebenen Reihenfolge vor. • Die Montage sollte von mindestens zwei Personen vorgenommen werden. • Achten Sie darauf, die richtige Schraubengröße zu verwenden, wie es oben gezeigt ist. Die Verwendung der falschen Schrauben kann zu Schäden führen. • Achten Sie während der Montage darauf, bei jedem Arbeitsgang alle Schrauben festzuziehen. • Für die Demontage muß die angegebene Reihenfolge umgekehrt befolgt werden. Sie benötigen einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher (+). Es werden die in der “Bauteile”-Zeichnung abgebildeten Teile verwendet. Folgen Sie beim Zusammenbau den Anweisungen, und wählen Sie die jeweils benötigten Teile. Sie die Seitenwände (D) am PedalZ Befestigen kasten (C). Bevor Sie den Pedalkasten montieren, nehmen Sie zunächst das gebündelte Kabel aus dem Pedalkasten, entfernen den Kabelbinder und ziehen das Kabel dann gerade aus. Werfen Sie den Kabelbinder nicht wg, er wird in Schritt V wieder gebraucht. Bringen Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Seite des Pedalkastens (C) mit denen an den Seitenwänden (D) zur Deckung, und schrauben Sie den Pedalkasten mit den vier 6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben 1, jeweils zwei Schrauben links und rechts, an den Seitenwänden fest. Achten Sie dabei darauf, daß die Pedale in dieselbe Richtung weisen wie die vorspringenden Teile der Füße. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 D D C 6 x 25 mm round-head screws 1 6 x 25 mm Halbrundschrauben 1 Vis à tête ronde de 6 x 25 mm 1 Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm 1 CLP-930: Assemblage du support de clavier PRECAUTION • Veiller à ne pas mélanger les pièces et à les installer dans le sens correct. Veuillez assembler l’instrument dans l’ordre indiqué ci-dessous. • La présence de deux personnes minimum est nécessaire pour procéder au montage. • Toujours utiliser des vis aux dimensions correctes, comme indiqué cidessus. I’utilisation de vis aux dimensions incorrectes pourrait en effet endommager l’instrument. • Resserrer convenablement toutes les vis après le montage de chaque élément. • Pour démonter le Clavinova, inverser l’ordre des indications données ci-dessous. Munissez-vous d’un tournevis Phillips (cruciforme). CLP-930: Conjunto del soporte del teclado CUIDADO • Observe cuidado para no confundir las piezas, y asegúrese de montar todas ellas en el sentido correcto. Proceda al montaje en el orden indicado a continuación. • El montaje deberá realizarse al menos por dos personas. • Procure utilizar los tornillos del tamaño adecuado, según se indica arriba. El empleo de tornillos inadecuados puede ocasionar daños en el instrumento. • Asegúrese de apretar bien todos los tornillos después de montar cada unidad. • Para desmontar las unidades, invierta la secuencia de montaje facilitada a continuación. Tenga preparado un destornillador de cabeza en cruz (+). Les éléments qui sont représentés sur la figure intitulée “Éléments à assembler” seront utilisés. Veuillez vous conformer aux instructions d’assemblage et sélectionner les éléments nécessaires. Se usarán las partes mostradas en la ilustración de “Partes del conjunto”. Siga las instrucciones de montaje y seleccione las partes a medida que se requieran. les panneaux latéraux (D) au pédalier Z Fixez (C) los paneles laterales (D) en la caja de Z Acople pedales (C). Avant de poser le pédalier, détacher le cordon de la partie inférieure du pédalier et le dérouler. Ne jetez pas l’attache en vinyle, vous la réutiliserez ultérieurement à l’étape V. Faites correspondre les trous visibles sur le flanc du pédalier (C) avec deux des panneaux latéraux (D), puis fixer le pédalier sur les panneaux latéraux à l’aide de quatre vis de fixation à tête ronde de 6 x 25 millimètres 1 - soit deux vis de chaque côté. Veillez à ce que les pédales soient dirigées dans le même sens que les supports inférieurs. Antes de instalar la caja de pedales, desate y enderezca el cable plegado unido a la parte inferior de la caja de pedales. No tire la abrazadera de vinilo, porque la necesitará en el paso V de más adelante. Alinee los orificios del lado de la caja de pedales (C) con los de los paneles laterales (D), y acople la caja de pedales a los paneles laterales empleando los cuatro tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 milímetros 1 — dos tornillos en cada lado. Asegúrese de que el pedal se extiende en la misma dirección que la pata. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 55 2 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 12 mm 2 Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2 B B D 4 x 20 mm tapping screws 3 4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 3 Vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 3 Tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 3 X Attach the rear panel (B). X Montieren Sie die Rückwand (B). With the rear panel slightly angled as shown in the illustration, lower it onto the feet’s protruding edge at the rear of the pedal box. Then, while eliminating any gaps between the rear and side panels, secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets using two 4 x 12 mm round-head screws 2. Finally, secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four 4 x 20 mm tapping screws 3. Setzen Sie die Rückwand leicht abgewinkelt, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, hinter dem Pedalkasten auf die hervorspringenden Teile der Füße auf. Schrauben Sie dann die Rückwand oben mit zwei 4 x 12 mm Halbrundschrauben 2 so an den Seitenwänden fest, daß kein Spiel zwischen Rückwand und Seitenwänden verbleibt. Schrauben Sie die Rückwand abschließend noch mit vier 4 x 20 mm Schneidschrauben 3 an den Pedalkasten. C Install the main unit (A). C Montieren Sie die Tastatureinheit (A). Place the main unit (A) on the side panels (D) with the screws on its bottom panel (toward the rear of the main unit) just behind the grooves in the brackets located at the top of the side panels. Then slide the main unit forward until it stops. WATCH YOUR FINGERS WHEN DOING THIS!! Align the holes on the bottom panel of the main unit with the holes in the brackets on the side panels (also center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides, as shown in the illustration), then use the four 6 x 16 millimeter flat-head screws 4 to attach the main unit. The four screws can be attached from the front. Setzen Sie die Tastatureinheit (A) so auf den fertigen Ständer, daß die beiden Schrauben an ihrer Unterseite hinter den Winkelblechen mit Führungsschlitz an der Hinterseite des Ständers zu liegen kommen. Schieben Sie die Tastatureinheit dann bis zum Anschlag in die Schlitze. KLEMMEN SIE IHRE FINGER DABEI NICHT EIN!! Richten Sie die Schraubenbohrungen an der Unterseite der Tastatureinheit mit den Bohrungen der Winkelbleche aus (achten Sie auch darauf, daß sie mittig auf dem Ständer steht, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt), um die Tastatureinheit dann mit den vier 6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben 4 festzuschrauben. Die vier Schrauben können von der Vorderseite her eingedreht werden. CAUTION • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the above illustration. • Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. 56 CLP-950/930 VORSICHT • Halten Sie die Tastatureinheit nur wie in der obigen Abbildung! • Achten Sie darauf, daß Sie Ihre Finger nicht zwischen Tastatureinheit und den Seitenwänden bzw. der Rückwand einklemmen — die Tastatureinheit könnte dadurch zu Fall kommen! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3 6 x 16 mm flat-head screws 4 6 x 16 mm Senkschrauben 4 Vis à tête plate de 6 x 16 mm 4 Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 mm 4 10 cm A 10 cm ● Be sure to place your hands at least 10 centimeters from either end of the main unit when positioning it. ● Mindestens 10 cm innen unter die Tastatureinheit greifen. ● Placez bien vos mains à 10 cm au moins des extrémités du clavier, lors de sa mise en place. ● Asegúrese de colocar las manos por lo menos a 10 centímetros desde los extremos de la unidad principal cuando la sitúe. A D X Fixez le panneau arrière (B) X Monte el panel trasero (B). En inclinant légèrement en angle le panneau arrière, comme mentionné sur l’illustration, abaissez-le sur le rebord des pieds, à l’arrière du pédalier. Puis, tout en éliminant les espaces entre les panneaux arrière et latéraux, fixez le haut du panneau arrière sur les supports des panneaux latéraux à l’aide de deux vis à tête ronde 4 x 12 mm 2. Et finalement, fixez le bas du panneau arrière au pédalier avec quatre vis auto-taraudeuses 4 x 20 mm 3. Con el panel trasero un poco inclinado en ángulo como se muestra en la ilustración, bájelo al borde saliente de las patas de la parte posterior de la caja de pedales. Entonces, mientras elimina los huelgos entre los paneles trasero y lateral, fije la parte superior del panel trasero a las ménsulas de panel lateral usando dos tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 12 mm 2. Finalmente, fije la parte inferior del panel trasero a la caja de pedales usando cuatro tornillos de autoenrosque de 4 x 20 mm 3. C Installez le clavier (A) Placez le clavier sur les panneaux latéraux (D), avec les vis de son panneau inférieur (situées vers l’arrière du clavier) placées immédiatement derrière les rainures des ferrures situées à la partie supérieure des panneaux latéraux (D), puis faites glisser le clavier vers l’avant jusqu’à ce qu’il vienne en butée. FAITES ATTENTION A VOS DOIGTS EN EXECUTANT CETTE OPERATION!! Alignez les trous du panneau inférieur du clavier sur les trous des ferrures des panneaux latéraux (centrez également le clavier de manière à avoir un jeu identique de chaque côté) utilisez ensuite quatre vis de fixation à tête plate de 6 x 16 millimètres 4 pour immobiliser le clavier. Les quatre vis peuvent être fixées par l’avant. PRECAUTION • Ne tenez pas le clavier d’une autre manière que celle indiquée sur l’illustration ci-dessus. • Attention car vous risquez de vous faire pincer les doigts entre le clavier et les panneaux arrière ou latéraux de sorte que vous devez veiller à ne pas faire tomber le clavier. C Instale la unidad principal (A). Coloque la unidad principal en los paneles laterales (D) con los tornillos de su panel inferior (hacia la parte posterior de la unidad principal) justo detrás de las ranuras de la ménsula ubicada en la parte superior de los paneles laterales (D), después deslice el teclado hacia adelante hasta que se pare. ¡TENGA CUIDADO CON SUS DEDOS MIENTRAS LO HACE! Alinee los orificios del panel inferior de la unidad principal con los orificios de las ménsulas de los paneles laterales (también centre la unidad principal para producir una holgura igual en los lados derecho e izquierdo, como se muestra en la ilustración), y emplee entonces los cuatro tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 16 milímetros 4 para montar la unidad principal. Los cuatro tornillos pueden colocarse desde delante. CUIDADO • No sostenga el teclado en ninguna posición que no sea la posición mostrada en la ilustración de arriba. • Podría pillarse los dedos ente la unidad principal y los paneles traseros o laterales, por lo que deberá tener mucho cuidado que no se caiga la unidad principal. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 57 MIDIPC-1 4 Cord holder Kabelhalter Serre-câble Soporte del cable 5 ● A voltage selector is provided in some areas. ● Spannungswähler (nur in bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten) ● Un sélecteur de tension est prévu pour certaines régions ● El selector de tensión está provisto para ciertos destinos. PC-2 Mac PEDA L AC INLE T MIDIPC-1 PC-2 Mac ● Use the vinyl tie that was removed from the bundled pedal cord in step Z to tie up any slack in the pedal cord. ● Nehmen Sie überlanges Kabel mit dem in Schritt Z entfernten Kabelbinder auf. ● Utilisez l’attache en vinyle qui a été enlevée du cordon de pédalier à l’étape Z pour attacher le fil excédentaire du cordon de pédalier. ● Emplee la abrazadera de vinilo que se sacó del cale plegado de los pedales en el paso Z para fijar el cable de pedales sobrante. AC INLET 220 240 110 127 V Connect the pedal cord. V Schließen Sie das Pedalkabel an. The pedal cord from the pedal box must be plugged into the PEDAL connector located at the rear of the main unit’s underside. Once connected, attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. Das vom Pedalkasten kommende Pedalkabel wird an die PEDALBuchse hinten an der Unterseite der Tastatureinheit angeschlossen. Bringen Sie nach dem Anschluß die Kabelhalter an der Rückwand an, um das Kabel dann in diese Halter zu klemmen. B Voltage Selector B Den Spannungswähler einstellen. Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. Bevor Sie nun das Netzkabel anschließen, müssen Sie den Spannungswähler (falls vorhanden) auf die örtliche Netzspannung einstellen. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungswähler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der richtige Spannungswert (110, 127, 220 oder 240) an der Pfeilmarkierung steht. Bei der Auslieferung werden alle Instrumente mit Spannungswähler auf “240” voreingestellt. Nachdem Sie den Spannungswähler auf den richtigen Spannungswert eingestellt haben, stecken Sie das Netzkabel in die AC INLET-Buchse und schließen es an eine Steckdose an. In manchen Gebieten wird ein Steckerdapter mitgeliefert, um den Anschluß an die evtl. unterschiedlich geformte Steckdose zu ermöglichen. VORSICHT CAUTION • An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. N Set the adjuster. • Eine falsche Spannungseinstellung kann das Clavinova schwer beschädigen und Funktionsstörungen zur Folge haben. N Justieren Sie schließlich noch den Höhenversteller. For stability, an adjuster is provided on the bottom of the pedal box (C). Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. The adjuster ensures stable pedal operation and facilitates pedal effect control. If the adjuster is not in firm contact with the floor surface, distorted sound may result. Zur Stabilisierung ist an der Unterseite des Pedalkastens (C) ein Höhenversteller vorgesehen. Schrauben Sie den Höhenversteller heraus, bis er fest auf dem Fußboden steht. Der Höhenversteller sorgt für stabile Pedalbetätigung und ermöglicht eine präzise Regelung des Betätigungshubs. Wenn er nicht fest auf dem Boden steht, können beim Treten der Pedale Klangverzerrungen auftreten. ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following. ■ Wenn der Zusammenbau beendet ist, prüfen Sie bitte folgende Dinge: • Are there any parts left over? ➔ Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➔ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? ➔ Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? ➔ Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? ➔ Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. ● After assembly is complete, it will be necessary to remove the keyboard string. This procedure is performed once only and the string will never have to be reattached again. For instructions on its removal, refer to the paper titled "REQUEST" that can be found on the keys underneath the key cover (see page 10). 58 CLP-950/930 • Sind Teile übrig geblieben? ➔ Gehen Sie den Vorgang des Zusammenbaus noch einmal durch und korrigieren Sie eventuelle Fehler. • Befindet sich das Clavinova weit genug von Türen und anderen beweglichen Vorrichtungen entfernt? ➔ Bewegen Sie das Clavinova an einen entsprechend sicheren Ort. • Macht das Clavinova Klappergeräusche, wenn Sie es schütteln? ➔ Ziehen Sie alle Schrauben fest. • Klappert der Pedalkasten oder gibt er nach, wenn Sie das Pedal treten? ➔ Drehen Sie den Höhenversteller, bis er fest auf dem Fußboden steht. • Sind Pedal-und Netzkabel richtig an den Buchsen angeschlossen? ➔ Prüfen Sie die Verbindung. • Wenn die Haupteinheit knarrt oder beim Spielen wackelt, betrachten Sie die Abbildungen und ziehen Sie alle Schrauben noch einmal nach. ● Nach dem Zusammenbau müssen Sie den Tastatur-Sicherungsdraht entfernen. Diese Arbeit wird nur einmal ausgeführt, und der Draht braucht später nicht wieder angebracht zu werden. Anweisungen hierzu entnehmen Sie bitte dem unter der Tastaturabdeckung auf den Tasten liegenden Hinweisblatt (siehe Seite 10). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 CAUTION • When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the lower surface of the main unit, NEVER the top portion or keyboard cover. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. C VORSICHT • Fassen Sie zum Umstellen des Instruments nach dem Zusammenbau stets unter das Gehäuse; heben Sie es NIEMALS am oberen Teil des Gehäuses oder am Tastaturdeckel. Bei Nichtbeachtung dieses Punkts kann das Instrument beschädigt und im Extremfall eine Verletzung hervorgerufen werden. PRECAUTION • Pour déplacer l’instrument après le montage, toujours tenir l’instrument par la surface inférieure, JAMAIS par sa partie supérieure ou par le protègeclavier. Une mauvaise manipulation peut provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. CUIDADO • Cuando mueva el instrumento después del montaje, sostenga siempre la superficie inferior de la unidad principal, y NUNCA la parte superior de la cubierta del teclado. La manipulación indebida puede causar daños en el instrumento o personales. V Raccordez le câble du pédalier Le câble du pédalier qui sort du logement de pédalier doit être raccordé au connecteur PEDAL implanté à l’arrière du panneau de dessus de l’instrument. Une fois branché, fixez les attaches de câble sur la face arrière en procédant de la façon représentée sur la figure puis emboîtez le câble dans les attaches. B Sélecteur de tension Avant de connecter le cordon d’alimentation, vérifiez le réglage du sélecteur de tension qui est prévu pour certaines régions. Pour régler le sélecteur sur 110 V, 127 V, 220 V ou 240 V, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le cadran du sélecteur afin de mettre l’indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d’usine. Après avoir choisi la tension appropriée, branchez le cordon d’alimentation secteur dans la prise AC INLET de l’instrument et une prise de sortie secteur. Un adaptateur de prise peut également être fourni dans certaines régions pour pouvoir brancher le cordon à la prise secteur murale. PRECAUTION • Vous risquez de sérieusement endommager le Clavinova ou de provoquer un fonctionnement anormal de l’instrument en ne choisissant pas correctement la tension d’alimentation. N N’oubliez pas de régler la hauteur du pédalier Pour assurer la stabilité du pédalier (C), un dispositif de réglage a été prévu à sa partie inférieure. Tournez ce dispositif jusqu’à ce qu’il soit en contact ferme avec la surface du sol. Ce dispositif assure la stabilité du pédalier lors de son utilisation et facilite la commande au pied des effets. Si ce dispositif n’est pas en contact ferme avec le sol, il pourra se produire une distorsion du son. ■ Lorsque le montage est terminé, veuillez mener à bien les vérifications suivantes. • Reste-t-il des pièces non utilisées? ➔ Passer en revue la procédure de montage et corriger toute erreur éventuelle. • Le Clavinova est-il placé à l’écart des portes et de toute autre structure mobile? ➔ Déplacer le Clavinova vers un emplacement approprié. • Lorsque vous secouez quelque peu le Clavinova, entendez-vous un cliquetis? ➔ Serrer convenablement toutes les vis. • Le pédalier fait-il du bruit ou s’écarte-t-il lorsque vous appuyez sur les pédales? ➔ Tourner le stabilisateur de sorte que le Clavinova repose fermement sur le sol. • Les cordons des pédales et d’alimentation sont-ils bien enfoncés dans les prises? ➔ Vérifier toutes les connexions. • Si la partie principale de l’appareil craque ou est instable lorsque vous jouez sur le clavier, consulter les diagrammes de montage et resserrer toutes les vis. ● Dès que l’assemblage est complètement terminé, la corde de clavier doit être retirée. Ceci n’est exécuté qu’une seule fois et il ne sera plus nécessaire de fixer la corde à nouveau. En ce qui concerne les instructions pour retirer cette corde, veuillez vous référer à la page intitulée “REQUEST” qui est placée sur les touches du clavier sous le couvreclavier (voir page 10). V Conecte el cable de los pedales. El cable de los pedales procedente de la caja de pedales debe enchufarse al conector PEDAL situado en la parte posterior del lado inferior de la unidad principal. Una vez se ha conectado, coloque los soportes de cable del panel posterior como se muestra, y sujete el cable en los soportes. B Selector de tensión Antes de conectar el cable de alimentación de CA, compruebe el ajuste del selector de tensión que se incorpora para ciertos destinos. Para ajustar el selector a 110V, 127V, 220V ó 240V de la red de alimentación, emplee un destornillador de cabeza recta “-” para girar el selector de modo que la tensión correcta de su zona aparezca al lado del indicador del panel. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Después de haber seleccionado la tensión correcta, enchufe el cable de alimentación de CA a la toma AC INLET y a una toma de corriente de la pared. En algunas zonas puede suministrarse también un adaptador para adaptar la configuración de las patillas de los tomacorrientes de CA de su localidad. CUIDADO • Un ajuste incorrecto de la tensión puede causar daños serios a la Clavinova o ser motivo de mal funcionamiento. N Asegúrese de ajustar el ajustador. Para la estabilidad del aparato, se proporciona un ajustador en la parte inferior de la caja de pedales (C). Gire el ajustador hasta que contacte firmemente con el suelo. El ajustador asegura una operación estable de los pedales y facilita el control del efecto de los pedales. Si el ajustador no contacta firmemente con el suelo, puede resultar en sonido distorsionado. ■ Cuando haya concluido el montaje, compruebe los siguientes puntos: • ¿Ha quedado alguna pieza sin instalar? ➔ Revise el procedimiento de montaje y corrija cualquier error que se haya podido cometer. • ¿Está el Clavinova alejado del recorrido de puertas y muebles? ➔ Traslade el Clavinova a una posición adecuada. • ¿Suena algún ruido de holgura cuando se mueve el Clavinova? ➔ Apriete con firmeza todos los tornillos. • ¿Vibra o cede la caja de pedales cuando se pisan los pedales? ➔ Gire el estabilizador hasta que apoye firmemente sobre el suelo. • ¿Están perfectamente insertados los cables de pedal y alimentación en los conectores? ➔ Revise las conexiones. • Si la unidad principal cruje o presenta algún signo de inestabilidad cuando se toca el teclado, consulte los esquemas de montajee y vuelva a apretar todos los tornillos. ● Después de haber terminado el montaje, será necesario extraer la cuerda del teclado. Este procedimiento sólo se lleva a cabo una vez y la cuerda no se tendrá que volver a atar nunca más. Para las instrucciones sobre la extracción de la cuerda, consulte el documento titulado “RUEGO” que encontrará sobre las teclas debajo de la cubierta del teclado (vea la página 10). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 59 Specifications/Technische Daten/Caractéristiques techniques/Especificaciones CLP-950/950M/950C CLP-930 88 KEYS (A-1 ~ C7) KEYBOARD 64 NOTES MAX. POLYPHONY VOICE SELECTORS 12 voices 8 voices REVERB ROOM, HALL 1, HALL 2, STAGE EFFECT CHORUS, PHASER, TREMOLO, DELAY HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT, FIXED TOUCH SENSITIVITY SONG CONTROLS TRACK 1, TRACK 2, SONG [START/STOP], REC PEDAL CONTROLS SOFT, SOSTENUTO, DAMPER OTHER CONTROLS MASTER VOLUME, BRILLIANCE (CLP-950), DEMO, TRANSPOSE, FUNCTION, METRONOME [START/STOP], TEMPO/FUNCTION [t]/[s], [–/NO]/[[+/YES], PRESET SONG, SPLIT (CLP-950), LED Display JACKS/CONNECTORS INPUT & OUTPUT LEVEL/IMPEDANCE MAIN AMPLIFIERS WEIGHT AUX OUT: Output impedance 600 Ω AUX IN: Input impedance 10 kΩ / Input sensitivity 0.26V 60W x 2 20W x 2 14 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2 16 cm x 2 without music stand 1372 x 504 x 843 mm (54" x 19-7/8" x 33-1/4") 1370 x 501 x 843 mm (54" x 19-3/4" x 33-1/4") with music stand 1372 x 504 x 1028 mm (54" x 19-7/8" x 40-1/2") 1370 x 501 x 1030 mm (54" x 19-3/4" x 40-1/2") 68.0 kg (149.9 lbs.) 50.0 kg (110.2 lbs.) SPEAKERS DIMENTIONS (W x D x H) PHONES x 2, AUX OUT R & L/L+R, AUX IN R & L/L+R, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, HOST SELECT, TO HOST, PEDAL* * The CLP-950 PEDAL connector is not accessible from the outside of the instrument’s cabinet (it is internally connected to the pedal unit during the assembly procedure). * Die PEDAL-Buchse des CLP-950 ist im Gehäuse verborgen und von außen her nicht zugänglich (der Kabelstecker muß beim Zusammenbau des Instruments angeschlossen werden). * Le connecteur de pédale CLP-950 PEDAL n’est pas accessible de l’extérieur de l’ébénisterie de l’instrument (il est connecté au pédalier par connexion interne au cours des opérations d’assemblage). * El conector de PEDAL del CLP-950 no puede accederse desde fuera de la caja del instrumento (se conecta internamente a la unidad de pedales durante el procedimiento de montaje). • Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. • Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung. 60 CLP-950/930 • Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche. • Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ MEMO NOTIZEN NOTES MEMORANDUM .............................................................................................................................. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ CLP-950/930 61 MEMO NOTIZEN NOTES MEMORANDUM .............................................................................................................................. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 92-469-2 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America, Keyboard Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 PHILIPPINES DENMARK OTHER COUNTRIES HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [CL] 21 Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2000 Yamaha Corporation V495600 0??POZC??.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66

Yamaha CLP-950M El manual del propietario

Categoría
Pianos digitales
Tipo
El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para